561553

Denon AVR-X5200W Handleiding

3
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/335
Pagina verder
.
AVR-X5200W
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Owner’s Manual
You can print more than one page of a PDF onto a single sheet of paper.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
1
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Accessories
8
Inserting the batteries
9
Operating range of the remote control unit
9
Features
10
High quality sound
10
High performance
11
Easy operation
14
Part names and functions
15
Front panel
15
Display
19
Rear panel
21
Remote control unit
24
Connections
Connecting speakers
28
Speaker installation
28
Speaker connection
35
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings
38
Connecting a TV
55
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)
56
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)
57
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
58
Connecting a playback device
59
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
60
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
61
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link
HD function
62
Connecting a video camcorder or game console
63
Connecting a turntable
64
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
65
Connecting an FM/AM antenna
67
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
69
Wired LAN
69
Wireless LAN
70
Connecting an external control device
71
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
71
TRIGGER OUT jacks
72
Connecting the power cord
73
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Contents
2
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playback
Basic operation
75
Turning the power on
75
Selecting the input source
75
Adjusting the volume
76
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
76
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player
76
Playing an iPod
77
Listening to music on an iPod
78
iPod Browse Mode settings
79
Performing repeat playback
81
Performing random playback
81
Playing a USB memory device
82
Playing files stored on USB memory devices
83
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
85
Pairing with a Bluetooth device
86
Playing a Bluetooth device
87
Pairing with the Pairing Mode
89
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
90
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
91
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
93
RDS search
93
PTY search
94
TP search
95
Radio Text
95
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
96
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
Preset Memory)
96
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
97
Listening to preset stations
97
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
98
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
99
Cancelling Preset Skip
100
Listening to Internet Radio
101
Listening to Internet Radio
102
Playing the last played Internet Radio station
103
Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites
104
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
105
Applying media sharing settings
106
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
107
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
3
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
109
Viewing photographs shared by particular users
110
Viewing all photographs on Flickr
112
AirPlay function
113
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad
114
Playing iTunes music with this unit
114
Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
115
Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit
of this unit
115
Spotify Connect function
116
Playing Spotify music with this unit
116
Convenience functions
117
Performing repeat playback
118
Performing random playback
118
Registering to Favorites
119
Playing back content added to the “Save to Favorites”
119
Deleting content added to favorites
120
Searching content with keywords (Text Search)
120
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)
121
Setting the Slideshow Interval
122
Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)
122
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)
123
Adjusting the tone (Tone)
124
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)
125
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)
126
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)
127
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
4
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Selecting a sound mode
128
Selecting a sound mode
129
Direct playback
130
Pure Direct playback
130
Auto surround playback
131
HDMI control function
143
Setting procedure
143
Sleep timer function
144
Using the sleep timer
145
Quick select plus function
146
Calling up the settings
147
Changing the settings
148
Web control function
149
Controlling the unit from a web control
149
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
151
Connecting ZONE
151
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
156
Settings
Menu map
158
Menu operations
161
Inputting characters
162
Using the keyboard screen
163
Using the number buttons
163
Audio
164
Subwoofer Level Adjust
164
Surround Parameter
164
Restorer
169
Audio Delay
170
Volume
170
Audyssey
171
Graphic EQ
175
Video
177
Picture Adjust
177
HDMI Setup
179
Output Settings
183
Component Video Out
187
On Screen Display
188
TV Format
189
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
5
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Inputs
190
Input Assign
190
Source Rename
192
Hide Sources
192
Source Level
192
Input Select
193
Speakers
194
Audyssey
®
Setup
194
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey
®
Setup)
196
Error messages
202
Retrieving Audyssey
®
Setup settings
204
Manual Setup
205
Amp Assign
205
Speaker Config.
220
Distances
224
Levels
225
Crossovers
226
Bass
227
Front Speaker
228
2ch Playback
228
Network
231
Information
231
Connection
231
Wi-Fi Setup
232
Settings
234
IP Control
235
Friendly Name
236
Diagnostics
236
Maintenance Mode
237
General
238
Language
238
ECO
238
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
240
Zone Rename
242
Quick Select Names
242
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
242
Front Display
243
Information
243
Usage Data
245
Firmware
246
Setup Lock
248
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
6
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operating external devices with the remote control unit
249
Registering preset codes
250
Operating devices
252
Initializing registered preset codes
255
Specifying the operating zone with the remote control
255
Resetting the remote control unit
255
Tips
Tips
257
Troubleshooting
259
Resetting factory settings
277
Appendix
About HDMI
278
Video conversion function
281
Playing back a USB memory devices
283
Playing back a Bluetooth device
284
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
285
Playing back Internet Radio
286
Personal memory plus function
286
Last function memory
286
Sound modes and channel output
287
Sound modes and surround parameters
289
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
292
Explanation of terms
295
Trademark information
306
Specifications
308
Index
314
List of preset codes
317
License
328
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
7
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Thank you for purchasing this Denon product.
To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
.
. . .
.
Quick Start Guide CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
Safety Instructions Notes on radio Cable labels
.
. . . .
Power cord FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna Sound calibration
microphone
(ACM1HB)
Sound calibration
microphone stand
.
.
.
Remote control unit
(RC-1193)
R6P/AA batteries External antennas for
Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
8
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Inserting the batteries
1
Slide the rear cover off the remote control unit in the
arrow direction.
.
2
Insert two batteries correctly into the battery
compartment as indicated.
.
R6P/AA batteries
3
Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
0
To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0
Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
0
Do not use two different types of batteries.
0
Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long
periods.
0
If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control
unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
.
30° 30°
Approx. 7 m
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
9
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Features
High quality sound
0
With discrete circuit technology, the power amplifier provides
identical quality for all 9-channels (175 Watts x 9-channels)
For optimum realism and stunning dynamic range, the power amplifier
section features discrete power devices (not integrated circuitry).
By using high current, high power discrete power devices, the amplifier
is able to easily drive high quality speakers.
0
Dolby Atmos (v
p. 296)
This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos, a
completely new audio format. The placement or movement of sound is
accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling
you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound
field.
0
Audyssey DSX
®
(v
p. 174)
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX
®
processor. By connecting
front height speakers to this unit and playing back with Audyssey DSX
®
processing you can experience a more vertically expansive front
soundstage. By connecting two front wide speakers, you can
experience a wider and more expanded front soundstage.
0
Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (v
p. 173)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds
disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey
LFC™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low
frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies
psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for
listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs
the neighbors.
0
Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (v p. 195)
The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level
and delay for each subwoofer individually.
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first
compensating for any level and delay differences between the two
subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32 to both
subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.
0
DTS Neo:X (v p. 128)
This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or
7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 9.1-channel
speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.
0
Denon’s unique high quality playback technology “Denon Link
HD” (v
p. 62)
This unit is equipped with our exclusive “Denon Link HD” technology.
When connected to a Denon disc player that has Denon Link HD, the
sound localization becomes more precise, with increased detail and
definition. The system works by carrying the critical clock timing signals
via the dedicated Denon Link HD connection, minimizing the jitter
caused by conventional digital connections. This effect can be applied
to an audio source of any media from a Blu-ray disc player.
This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or
7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 11.1-channel
speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
10
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
High performance
0
4K 60Hz input/output supported
.
4K 60p
4:4:4
4K 60p
4:4:4
When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60
frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected
to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy
the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even
when viewing fast-moving video.
This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit
videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets
you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.
0
Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD
resolution) to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (v
p. 185)
.
4K 4K
Up to 1080p
4K
Up scaling
This unit is equipped with a 4K video upscaling function that allows
analog video or SD (Standard Definition) video to be output via HDMI at
4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to
be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high
definition images for any video source.
0
Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 151)
The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you
enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing
in the main room.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
11
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV
devices (8 inputs, 3 output)
.
83
/
OutIn
For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8
HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and
conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI-
equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a
third HDMI output for another room.
0
The device is equipped with a AirPlay
®
function in addition to
network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v
p. 113)
.
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet
Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying
photographs stored on your PC on our television.
This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone
®
, iPad
®
, iPod touch
®
or iTunes
®
.
0
Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks
This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as
DSD (2.8 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality
playback of high resolution files.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
12
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out
easily (v p. 85)
.
You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your
smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.
0
Compatible with the “Denon Remote App”
z
for performing basic
operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android™ devices
(Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
“Denon Remote App” is application software that allows you to perform
basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone or Android
tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume, and
switching the source.
z
Download the appropriate “Denon Remote App” for your iOS or Android
devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless
LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.
0
Multi-Room audio (v p. 127)
.
【MAIN ZONE】【ZONE2】/【ZONE3】
You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE,
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being
played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same
time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout
the whole house.
0
Energy-saving design
This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to
enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during
use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the
power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce
unnecessary power use.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
13
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Easy operation
0
“Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,
etc.
0
Easy to use Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved
operability.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
14
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Part names and functions
Front panel
.
u
wqtre y
A B C D E F
G
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
15
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
A
Power operation button (X)
Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is
located) on/off (standby). (v
p. 75)
B
Power indicator
This is lit as follows according to the power status:
0
Green : Power on
0
Off: Normal standby
0
Red:
0
When “HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On” (v
p. 181)
0
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” (v
p. 181)
0
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On” (v p. 235)
C
SOURCE SELECT knob
This selects the input source. (v
p. 75)
D
Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
E
Display
This displays various pieces of information. (v
p. 19)
F
MASTER VOLUME knob
This adjusts the volume level. (v
p. 76)
G
Door
When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press
the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers
when closing the door.
.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
16
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
With the door open
.
io Q0qw rtyue
A
ZONE2 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE2 on/off. (v
p. 156)
B
ZONE2 SOURCE button
This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 156)
C
ZONE3 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE3 on/off. (v
p. 156)
D
ZONE3 SOURCE button
This selects the input source for ZONE3. (v
p. 156)
E
STATUS button
Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the
display. (v p. 79)
F
Information button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v
p. 244)
G
Cursor buttons (uio p)
These select items. (v
p. 161)
H
OPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen. (v p. 117)
I
DIMMER button
Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v
p. 243)
J
QUICK SELECT buttons
These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v
p. 146)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
17
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q
3
Q
4
Q
8
Q
1
Q
2
Q
7
Q
6
Q
5
K
AUX1 HDMI connector
This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 63)
L
USB port
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices)
and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 65)
M
Headphones jack (PHONES)
This is used to connect headphones.
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer
be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT
connectors.
NOTE
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.
N
BACK button
This returns to the previous screen. (v
p. 161)
O
ENTER button
This determines the selection. (v p. 161)
P
SETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v
p. 161)
Q
AUX1 INPUT connector
Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v
p. 63)
R
SETUP MIC jack
This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone.
(v p. 197)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
18
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Display
.
Q0 Q1 Q2
iuoyt
rewq
G
H I
J K L
A
Input signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.
(v p. 193)
B
Decoder indicators
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or
DTS decoder is running.
C
Audyssey
®
indicator
This lights when “MultEQ
®
XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey DSX
®
” or “Audyssey LFC
TM
” is set. (v
p. 171 - 174)
D
Tuner reception mode indicators
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “Tuner”.
TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.
RDS : Lights up when receiving RDS broadcasts.
E
Monitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to
“Auto(Dual)”, the indicators light according to connection status.
F
MULTI ZONE indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned
on. (v
p. 156)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
19
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Q0 Q1 Q2
iuo
G
Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v
p. 145)
H
MUTE indicator
This blinks while the sound is muted. (v
p. 76, 157)
I
Volume indicator
J
Information display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
K
Front speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
L
Input/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the
setting configured for “Channel Indicators”. (v p. 243)
0
When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Output” (Default)
These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
0
When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Input”
These light corresponding to the channels that include the input
signals.
When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE
channel) is input.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
20
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Rear panel
.
1 CBL/SAT
PHONO
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
SIGNAL
GND
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
AVR-X5200WBKE3
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
q
ir Q3 Q4 Q5Q1 Q2Q0o Q6
erw
ty
qu
A B C D
E F
A
G
H D I J K L M N O P
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
21
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
1 CBL/SAT
PHONO
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
SIGNAL
GND
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
AVR-X5200WBKE3
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
qerrw
ty
qu
A
Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when
connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v
p. 70)
A
Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity
evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
B
Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.
C
Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
qwe
B
Denon Link HD connector
Used to connect a Denon Link HD compatible Blu-ray Disc player.
(v
p. 62)
C
SIGNAL GND terminal
Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 64)
D
Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.
(v
p. 60)
E
HDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
(v
p. 56)
F
NETWORK connector
Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN
network. (v
p. 69)
G
AC inlet (AC IN)
Used to connect the power cord. (v
p. 73)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
22
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
1 CBL/SAT
PHONO
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
SIGNAL
GND
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
AVR-X5200WBKE3
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
iQ3 Q4 Q5Q1 Q2Q0oQ6
H
FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)
Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 67)
I
TRIGGER OUT jacks
Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function.
(v
p. 72)
J
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this
unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 71)
K
RS-232C connector
Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with
RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner’s manual of the home
automation controller for more information about serial control of this
unit.
L
Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.
(v p. 57)
M
Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)
Used to connect speakers. (v
p. 35)
N
PRE OUT connectors
Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power
amplifier. (v
p. 36, 54)
O
Video connectors (VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.
(v p. 58)
P
Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.
(v p. 58)
NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
23
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Remote control unit
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER
0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. TV AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
q
w
e
r
y
u
t
A
AVR operation buttons (AVR CONTROL MAIN, Z2, Z3)
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit. (v p. 156, 161)
B
Operation mode indicators
The “AVR” operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being
operated.
The “DEV.” indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
C
Device operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU)
These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v
p. 250)
D
Input source select buttons
These select the input source. (v p. 75, 156)
E
QUICK SELECT buttons (1 – 4)
These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v
p. 146)
F
Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df)
These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages.
(v
p. 79, 97)
G
MUTE button (:)
This mutes the output audio. (v p. 76, 156)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
24
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER
0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. TV AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
Q4
Q3
Q1
Q2
i
o
Q0
H
Information button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v
p. 244)
I
Cursor buttons (uio p)
These select items. (v p. 161)
J
BACK button
This returns to the previous screen. (v
p. 161)
K
System buttons
These perform playback related operations. (v
p. 79)
0
Skip buttons (8, 9)
0
Play button (1)
0
Search buttons (6, 7)
0
Pause button (3)
0
Stop button (2)
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)
These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 91)
L
Number / Character buttons
These enter letters or numbers into the unit. (v p. 91, 163)
M
Remote control signal transmitter
This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
N
POWER button (X)
This turns the power on/off. (v p. 75, 156)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
25
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER
0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. TV AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
W0
W1
W2
Q9
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q5
Q6
O
TV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 253)
P
ECO Mode button (G)
This switches to ECO Mode. (v
p. 238)
Q
VOLUME buttons (df)
These adjust the volume level. (v p. 76, 157)
R
OPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen. (v p. 117)
S
ENTER button
This determines the selection. (v
p. 161)
T
SETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 161)
U
SOUND MODE buttons
These select the sound mode. (v
p. 128)
0
MOVIE button
0
MUSIC button
0
GAME button
0
PURE button
V
SLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer. (v
p. 144)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
26
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Contents
Connecting speakers 28
Connecting a TV 55
Connecting a playback device 59
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 65
Connecting an FM/AM antenna 67
Connecting to a home network (LAN) 69
Connecting an external control device 71
Connecting the power cord 73
NOTE
0
Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the
“Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate “Quick Start Guide”) screen for making
connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do
not conduct current.)
0
Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in
noise.
o
Cables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to
connect.
Speaker cable
.
Subwoofer cable
.
HDMI cable
.
Component video cable
.
Video cable
.
Coaxial digital cable
.
Optical cable
.
Audio cable
.
R
L
R
L
LAN cable
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Connections
27
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting speakers
Install speakers and connect them to this unit. (v p. 28, 35)
Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you
are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room.
Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical
installation.
.
C
FL FR
SBL
SBR
SB
SW1
SW2
FWL
FWR
SL SR
FL/FR (Front
speaker left/right):
Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal
distance from the main listening position. The distance
between each speaker and your TV should also be the
same.
C (Center
speaker):
Place the CENTER speaker in between the front
speakers and above or below your TV.
SL/SR (Surround
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an
equal distance to the left and right sides of the main
listening position. If you don’t have surround back
speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind
your listening position.
SBL/SBR
(Surround back
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers
an equal distance from the main listening position and
directly behind the main listening position. When using
a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly
behind the listening position.
FWL/FWR
(Front wide speakers left/
right):
Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers
outside of the front left and right speakers so that there
is an equal distance between all front speakers.
SW 1/2 (Subwoofer) :
Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near
the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place
them asymmetrically across the front of your room.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
28
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
FHL FHR
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
RHL RHR
TMR
TML
FHL/FHR (Front
height speaker left/
right):
Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly above the front speakers. Mount them as
close to the ceiling as possible and aim them
towards the main listening position.
TFL/TFR (Top front
speaker left/right):
Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.
TML/TMR (Top
middle speaker left/
right):
Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers
directly above the main listening position and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TRL/TRR (Top rear
speaker left/right):
Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly behind your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.
RHL/RHR (Rear
height speaker left/
right):
Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly behind the main listening position. Mount
them as close to the ceiling as possible and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
29
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
FDL FDR
BDL BDR
SDL SDR
FDL/FDR (Front
Dolby speaker left/
right):
Place the FRONT DOLBY ENABLED speaker on
the front speaker. For a Dolby enabled speaker
integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby
enabled speaker instead of the front speaker.
SDL/SDR (Surround
Dolby speaker left/
right):
Place the SURROUND DOLBY ENABLED speaker
on the surround speaker. For a Dolby enabled
speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place
the Dolby enabled speaker instead of the surround
speaker.
BDL/BDR (Back
Dolby speaker left/
right):
Place the BACK DOLBY ENABLED speaker on the
surround back speaker. For a Dolby enabled
speaker integrated with a surround back speaker,
place the Dolby enabled speaker instead of the
surround back speaker.
About Dolby enabled speakers
Dolby enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound
to come from over your head by using a special upward-pointing speaker
that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where
speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
30
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX
®
, Dolby Atmos and DTS Neo:X which
offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation. (v p. 295, 296, 299)
When using Audyssey DSX
®
, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.
0
Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be
installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.
.
z1
z2
z3
z4
z5
Point slightly
downwards
Front height
speaker
z1 30° - 45°
z4 125° - 150°
z2 30° - 55°
z3 65° - 100°
z5 135° - 150°
GViewed from the sideH
Top middle speaker
Top front speaker
Top rear speaker
Front speaker
Surround
speaker
Surround
back
speaker
Front wide
speaker
Point slightly
downwards
Rear height
speaker
.
SL
TRL
RHL RHR
FHL
TML
TFL
FL
SR
TRR
FHR
TMR
TFR
FR
C
GViewed from the topH
Height speakers layout
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
31
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using
surround back speakers
.
z1
z2
z3
FL
SW
C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
Listening
position
z
1:22° - 30°
z
2:90° - 110°
z
3:135° - 150°
When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening
position.
o
When 9.1-channel speakers are installed using
front wide speakers
.
z3
z2
z1
z4
SBL
SBR
FL
SW
C
SL
FR
SR
FWL
FWR
z
1: 22° - 30°
z
2: 55° - 60°
z
3: 90° - 110°
z
4: 135° - 150°
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
32
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
When 5.1-channel speakers are installed
.
z1
z2
FL
SW
C
SL
FR
SR
z
1:22° - 30°
z
2:120°
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
33
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Layout including height speakers and top
speakers
n
Dolby Atmos layout example
Combination of 7.1-channel layout with surround back speaker and
top front/top rear speakers.
.
C
FL FR
SBL
SBR
SW
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
SL SR
n
DTS Neo:X layout example
Combination of 9.1-channel layout with surround back/front wide
speakers, and front height speakers.
.
FHL FHR
C
FL FR
SBL
SBR
SW
FWL
FWR
SL SR
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
34
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speaker connection
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.
This section explains how to connect them using typical examples.
NOTE
0
Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
0
Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear
panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. (“Protection circuit” (v p. 305))
0
Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so
could result in electric shock. When the “Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate
“Quick Start Guide”) is running, follow the instructions in the “Setup Assistant”
screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals
while the “Setup Assistant” is running.)
0
Use speakers with an impedance of 4 – 16 Ω/ohms.
NOTE
0
Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 – 6
Ω/ohms.
1.
Press and hold the main unit’s o and p at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
“zVideo Format < PAL>” appears on the display.
2.
Press i on the main unit twice.
“zSp. Impedance <8ohms>” appears on the display.
3.
Use o or p on the main unit to select the impedance.
6ohms:
Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers
is 6 Ω/ohms.
4ohms:
Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers
is 4 Ω/ohms.
4.
Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
35
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Connecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and –
(black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be
sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.
1
Peel off about 10 mm of sheathing from the tip of the
speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or
terminate it.
.
2
Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.
.
3
Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to the hilt into the
speaker terminal.
.
4
Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.
.
o
Connecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can
be connected to this unit.
To use two subwoofers, set “Subwoofer” to “2 spkrs” in the “Speaker
Config.” setting. (v p. 220)
The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and
Subwoofer 2.
.
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
SW1 SW2
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
36
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
About the speaker cable label (supplied) for
channel identification
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is
color-coded for each channel to be identifiable.
Speaker terminals Color
FRONT L White
FRONT R Red
CENTER Green
SURROUND L Light blue
SURROUND R Blue
SURROUND BACK L Beige
SURROUND BACK R Brown
FRONT WIDE L Light Purple
FRONT WIDE R Purple
FRONT HEIGHT L Light Yellow
FRONT HEIGHT R Yellow
TOP FRONT L Light Yellow
TOP FRONT R Yellow
TOP MIDDLE L Light Purple
TOP MIDDLE R Purple
TOP REAR L Light Purple
TOP REAR R Purple
REAR HEIGHT L Light Purple
REAR HEIGHT R Purple
FRONT DOLBY L Light Yellow
FRONT DOLBY R Yellow
SURROUND DOLBY L Light Purple
SURROUND DOLBY R Purple
BACK DOLBY L Light Purple
BACK DOLBY R Purple
SUBWOOFER Black
Attach the speaker cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as
shown in the diagram.
Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.
Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal
matches that of the speaker cable label.
G How to attach the speaker cable label H
.
This unit
Speaker
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
37
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings
This unit has a built-in 9-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing
the “Amp Assign” (v p. 205) settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone
playback.
Perform “Amp Assign” settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 205)
Playback speaker in each zone
“Amp Assign” settings Connection page
MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3
5.1-channel playback Not used Not used 7.1ch + ZONE2 40
7.1-channel playback (surround back) Not used Not used 7.1ch + ZONE2 41
9.1-channel playback Not used Not used 9.1ch (Default) 42
11.1-channel playback Not used Not used 11.1ch 43
7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) Not used Not used 7.1ch (Bi-Amp) 44
9.1-channel playback + 2-channel speakers for stereo playback Not used Not used 9.1ch/2ch Front 45
7.1-channel playback + 2-channel bi-amp speakers for stereo playback Not used Not used 7.1ch/2ch Front (Bi-Amp) 46
7.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit Not used Not used 7.1ch + Front B 47
7.1-channel playback 2-channel Not used 7.1ch + ZONE2 48
7.1-channel playback Not used 2-channel 7.1ch + ZONE3 48
5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) 2-channel Not used 5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2 49
5.1-channel playback 2-channel 2-channel 5.1ch + ZONE2/3 50
7.1-channel playback 1-channel 1-channel 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO 51
Dolby Atmos playback Not used Not used Dolby Atmos 52
The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See “Relationship between sound modes and channel output”
(v p. 287) for the sound modes that are supported.
The following pages provide basic connection examples.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
38
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
In addition to the connections described in (v p. 40 - 54), this unit allows for
various speaker connections with the “Amp Assign” setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in “View Terminal Config.” on the “Amp Assign” setting
screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.
.
1
SUBWOOFER
T.REAR
CENTER SURROUND
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONTFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
2
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
Speakers/Amp Assign
Back
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
AUTO SWITCHING AUTO SWITCHING AUTO SWITCHING
Assign Mode
-Height Speakers
-Height Layout
-Wide/Height2 Front Wide
-Pre-out Top Rear
11.1ch
4 Height Speakers
Top Front & Top Rear
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
39
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Standard configuration and connection
n
5.1-channel playback
This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.
.
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND SURROUNDFRONTFRONT
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
PHONO
AUDIO
SW
FR FL C SR SL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
40
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
7.1-channel playback (surround back)
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.
.
FL
SW
SL
FR
SR
SBRSBL
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND SURROUNDFRONTFRONT
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE
SURROUND BACKSURROUND BACK
SBR SBL
SW
FR FL C SR SL
When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L
terminal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
41
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Advanced connections
n
9.1-channel playback
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 9.1-channels at the same time.
You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
FL
SW
C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR
SR
SBR
FWL
FWR
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FWR FWL FHR FHLSW FR FL C SR SL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
42
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
11.1-channel playback
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 11.1-channels at the same time.
You can connect speakers for up to 13-channels for MAIN ZONE by using an external power amplifier. When you connect speakers for 12 or more
channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
C
FL FR
SBL
SBR
SW
FWL
FWR
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
SL SR
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FWR FWL TFR TFL
TRR TRL
SW FR FL C SR SL
Power amplifier
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
43
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
This system plays back 7.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate
amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned
without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.
You can connect speakers for up to 9 channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
SW
C
SL
SBL
FHR
SR
SBR
FL
(Bi-Amp)
FR
(Bi-Amp)
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
wqwq
(R) (L)
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FHR FHLSW
CSRSL
FLFR
NOTE
When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
44
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
Exclusive 9.1-channel playback + 2-channel playback speakers
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively
for 9.1 multi-channel playback. The speakers used exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback
are automatically switched for playback in accordance with the sound mode.
.
FHL
FLFL’
SW
C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR FR’
SR
SBR
FHL
FL
C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR
SR
SBR
FL’ FR’
Multi-channel playback
Switching
2-channel playback
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FHR FHLSW
FR FL C SR SL
FR’ FL’
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
45
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
Exclusive 7.1-channel playback + 2-channel playback (bi-amp connection) speakers
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively
for 7.1 multi-channel playback. You can use the bi-amp connection for the speakers exclusively used for 2-channel playback. The speakers used
exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback are automatically switched for playback in
accordance with the sound mode.
.
FLFL’
SW
C
SL
SBL
FR FR’
SR
SBR
FL C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
FL’ FL’
Multi-channel playback
Switching
(Bi-Amp)
(Bi-Amp)
2-channel playback
FL’ FR’
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
wqwq
(R) (L)
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBLSW FR FL C SR SL
FL’FR’
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
46
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
7.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
SW
C
SL
SBL
FHR
SR
SBR
FLFL
(B) (A)
FRFR
(A) (B)
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FHR FHLSW C SR SL
FR
(B)
FL
(B)
FR
(A)
FL
(A)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
47
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2.
(Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3).)
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
FHL
FL
SW
C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR
SR
SBR
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FHR FHLSW FR FL C SR SL
ZONE2
R
ZONE2
L
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
48
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback
(ZONE2)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in
MAIN ZONE.
.
SW
C
SL
SR
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
FL
(Bi-Amp)
FR
(Bi-Amp)
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
PHONO
AUDIO
wqwq
(R) (L)
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SW C SR SL ZONE2
R
ZONE2
L
FLFR
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
49
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
5.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
.
FL
SW
C
SL
FR
SR
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
ZONE3
L
ZONE3
R
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2 ZONE3
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SW
FR FL C SR SL
ZONE3
R
ZONE3
L
ZONE2
R
ZONE2
L
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
50
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
FL
SW
C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
ZONE2
Mono
ZONE3
Mono
FHR
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2 ZONE3
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL FHR FHLSW FR FL C SR SL
ZONE3
Mono
ZONE2
Mono
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
51
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Dolby Atmos
This speaker configuration is optimized for Dolby Atmos playback.
n
11.1-channel system
This system configuration plays back 11.1-channels by using an external power amplifier.
.
C
FL FR
SBL
SBR
SW
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
SL SR
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
ǡ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL TFR TFL
TRR TRL
SW FR FL C SR SL
Power amplifier
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
52
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
9.1-channel system
This configuration uses only this unit for Dolby Atmos playback.
.
C
FL FR
SBL
SBR
SW
SL SR
TMR
TML
.
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK
1
SUBWOOFER
HEIGHT2
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
PHONO
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㹼16
Ȑ
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SBR SBL TMR TMLSW FR FL C SR SL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
53
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Connecting an external power amplifier
You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each
channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced.
Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the
left channel (L) terminal.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
NETWORK
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
2
ZONE2 ZONE3
L
L
L
L
R R
RR
L
L
L
L
R R
R
L
L
R
R R
L
L
R
R
CENTER
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
2
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
1
AUDIO
RL
HEIGHT1
RL
HEIGHT2
RL
FRONT
WIDE
SURROUNDSURROUND
BACK
RL
Power amplifiers
Subwoofer
(Primary)
Subwoofer
(Secondary)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
54
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.
How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.
ARC (Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.
.
No
Yes
Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?
Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ?
Yes No
“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” (v
p. 56)
“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” (v p. 57)
“Connection 3 : TV equipped without
an HDMI connector” (v
p. 58)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
55
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v
p. 181)
When using the HDMI control function, connect to the HDMI
MONITOR 1 connector.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
(ARC)
IN
HDMI
TV
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
56
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT IN
IN
HDMI
TV
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
57
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE23 Blu-ray
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
MONITOR
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
B PR
IN
IN
or
TV
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
58
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors
(HDMI, digital audio and audio).
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.
In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
0
“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 60)
0
“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 61)
0
“Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function” (v p. 62)
0
“Connecting a video camcorder or game console” (v
p. 63)
0
“Connecting a turntable” (v p. 64)
0
Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0
The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See “Input Assign” on how
to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v
p. 190)
0
To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” to “TV”. (v p. 180)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
59
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
12
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE2
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
1 CBL/SAT
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
3 Blu-ray
R
L
R
L
OUT
HDMI
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPB PR
OUT
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
(HDMI incompatible device)
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
or or
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
60
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray disc player as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
12
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE2
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
1 CBL/SAT
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
3 Blu-ray
R
L
R
L
OUT
HDMI
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPB PR
OUT
OUT
HDMI
(HDMI incompatible device)
or or
DVD player
Blu-ray Disc
player
DVD player
When connecting a Blu-ray Disc Player that is compatible with Denon Link HD, see “Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD
function” (v p. 62).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
61
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function
By making a Denon Link HD connection to a player compatible with the Denon Link HD function, you can enjoy higher quality playback compared with
when only the HDMI connector connection is made.
0
Both HDMI and Denon Link HD connections are required for this
connection method.
0
Set “Input Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “HDMI”. (v
p. 193)
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AM
FM
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
Link HD
Denon
OUT
HDMI
Blu-ray
Disc player
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
62
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a video camcorder or game console
This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.
Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
.
OUT
HDMI
Video
camcorder
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
63
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving
coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
If you set this unit’s input source to “Phono” and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise
from the speakers.
NOTE
The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding
purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can
be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line
may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary
to connect the ground line.
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
PHONO
AUDIO
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
SIGNAL
GND
GND
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
(MM cartridge)
Turntable
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
64
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod.
For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (v
p. 77) or “Playing a USB memory device” (v p. 82).
.
iPod
or
USB memory
device
Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use
that device’s supplied AC adapter.
NOTE
0
USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
0
It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
0
Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
65
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Supported iPod/iPhone models
.
• iPod classic
• iPod nano
• iPod touch
• iPhone
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
66
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting an FM/AM antenna
Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to
the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the
antenna in this location. (“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 91))
If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an
outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
NOTE
0
Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
0
Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
(ASSIGN
A
DIGITAL
A
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
4
GAME
5
M
E
PLA
Y
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUN
D
FRONT
wq e
White
Black
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
67
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Using the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
.
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
When assembling, refer to “AM loop antenna assembly”.
.
o
AM loop antenna assembly
1
Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop
antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2
Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the
stand.
.
Projecting part
Square hole
Stand
Loop antenna
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
68
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various
types of playback and operations as described below.
0
Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s)
0
Playback of music content from online streaming services
0
Using the Apple AirPlay function
0
Operation on this unit via the network
0
Firmware Update
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.
Wired LAN
To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the
router to this unit as shown in the figure below.
.
L
k HD
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
IR
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
NETWORK
Internet
Modem
PC
Router
To WAN side
To LAN port
To LAN port
NAS
(Network Attached
Storage)
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
69
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Wireless LAN
When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external
antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel
and stand them upright.
See “Wi-Fi Setup” (v
p. 232) on how to connect to a wireless LAN
router.
.
Internet
Modem
To WAN side
Router with access point
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
0
When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following
functions:
0
Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0
Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a
speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
0
Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics
stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0
The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended.
If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be
affected by noise.
0
When using a router that supports the WPS （Wi-Fi Protected Setup） function, Wi-
Fi connection can be carried out easily.
0
When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the
IP address, etc. in “Network”. (v
p. 231)
NOTE
0
The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a
computer shop for details.
0
This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if
your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0
Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet
connector on your computer.
0
Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
70
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
When this unit is installed in a location where the remote control signals cannot reach (installation in a cabinet etc.), it can still be controlled by the remote
control by connecting a remote control receiver unit (sold separately).
You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 and ZONE3 (separate room).
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
12
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
TRIGGER OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
DC12V 150mA MAX.
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
REMOTE CONTROL
I
R
AUX
OUT
Infrared
sensor
Infrared
retransmitter
Output
Input
Device fitted with REMOTE CONTROL IN
connectors
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
71
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TRIGGER OUT jacks
When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.
The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC /150 mA electrical signal.
.
PHONO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
GND
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
Denon Link HD
AM
FM
ANTENNA
1 CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2
CD
1
TV
AUDIO
6 MEDIA PLAYER
2 DVD
3 Blu-ray
5 CD
4 GAME
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
RS-232C
REMOTE CONTROL
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
STRAIGHT CABLE
I
R
ZONE2 ZONE3
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
SURROUND BACK HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
PRE OUT
(ASSIGNABLE)
AUDIO
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
1
CBL
/SAT
2
DVD
3
Blu-ray
6
AUX2
7
CD
4
GAME
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
(ASSIGNABLE)
HDMI
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1FRONT
12
TRIGGER OUT
DC12V 150mA MAX.
12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device
NOTE
0
Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the TRIGGER OUT jacks. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.
0
If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the
power to the unit, and disconnect it.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
72
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.
.
1
CBL/SAT
1
CBL/SAT
2 DVD
2 DVD
4 GAME
(ASSIGNABLE)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(ASSIGNABLE)
(ASSIGNABLE)
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
MONITOR
ZONE23 Blu-ray
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
FRONT WIDE
CENTER
HEIGHT1
HEIGHT2
1
SUBWOOFER
NETWORK
2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
IMPEDANCE : 4㨪16
ǡ
Bluetooth
/
Wi-Fi
ANTENNA
AC IN
6
AUX2
7
CD
5
MEDIA
PLAYER
ARC
MONITOR1
ZONE2
MONITOR2
HDMI
SURROUND BACKURROUND BACK
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
To household power outlet
Power cord (supplied)
(AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
73
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Contents
Basic operation
Turning the power on 75
Selecting the input source 75
Adjusting the volume 76
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 76
Selecting a sound mode 128
Playback a device
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 76
Playing an iPod 77
Playing a USB memory device 82
Playing a Bluetooth device 87
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 90
Playback network audio/service
Listening to Internet Radio 101
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 105
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site 109
AirPlay function 113
Spotify Connect function 116
Convenience functions
Convenience functions 117
HDMI control function 143
Sleep timer function 144
Quick select plus function 146
Other functions
Web control function 149
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) 151
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Playback
74
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Basic operation
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
DE
V.
V. TV AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MENU
MENU
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
POWER
POWER
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
PHONO
PHONO
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
INP
INPUT
VOLUME
VOLUME
MUTE
MUTE
VOLUME
df
POWER
X
MUTE
:
Input source
select buttons
Turning the power on
1
Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
0
You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to
turn on the power.
0
You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1
Press the input source select button to be played back.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
75
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the volume
1
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0
The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
0
You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main
unit.
Turning off the sound temporarily
(Muting)
1
Press MUTE :.
0
MUTE indicator on the display flashes.
0
: appears on the TV screen.
0
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu. (v p. 170)
0
To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player.
1
Prepare for playback.
A
Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
B
Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
2
Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
3
Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4
Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.
o
Surround playback (v p. 128)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
76
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing an iPod
.
0
You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod
with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
0
For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this
unit, see “Supported iPod/iPhone models” (v p. 66).
0
See “AirPlay function” (v
p. 113) on how to play a music file saved on
an iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes on this unit via the network.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
77
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to music on an iPod
1
Connect the iPod to the USB port. (v p. 65)
2
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
“Browse from iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
0
Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Operate iPod itself while seeing the iPod screen to play
back music.
0
“iPod Browse Mode” has two modes, “From iPod” and “On-Screen”. By default,
“From iPod”, where you operate the iPod itself while looking at the iPod screen, is
set.
0
To change to “On-Screen”, where you perform operations while having the iPod
information displayed on the TV screen, see “iPod Browse Mode settings”
(v p. 79).
NOTE
0
Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not
operate.
0
Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising
with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” (v p. 79) is
set to “From iPod”.
0
“iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 79)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v
p. 125)
0
“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 126)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
78
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
iPod Browse Mode settings
In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are
displayed on the TV screen.
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in
“On-Screen”.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “iPod/USB”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Select “iPod Browse Mode”, then press ENTER.
The “iPod Browse Mode” screen is displayed.
3
Use o p to select “On-Screen”, then press ENTER.
0
Operations available for “On-Screen” and “From iPod” are listed
below.
iPod Browse Mode From iPod On-Screen
Playable
files
Music file
P P
Video file
z
Active
buttons
Remote control
unit (This unit)
P P
iPod
P
z
Only the sound is played.
4
Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.
Playback starts.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u i
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE d f
Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
0
The actions of the operation buttons may differ.
0
The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each time
the main unit’s STATUS is pressed during playback with “iPod Browse Mode” set
to “On-Screen”.
0
English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
79
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” is set to “On-
Screen”. (v p. 79)
0
“iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 79)
0
“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 81)
0
“Performing random playback” (v p. 81)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 125)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
80
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Performing repeat playback
1
Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-
Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
Off
(Default) :
Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One:
A file being played is played
repeatedly.
All:
All files in the folder currently being
played are played repeatedly.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.
Performing random playback
1
Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-
Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select random playback mode.
Off
(Default):
Disable random playback.
On:
Randomly play back all tracks in the
current playback folder.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0
During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another
track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0
“Random” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
81
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing a USB memory device
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
OPTION
OPTION
BACK
BACK
ENTER
ENTER
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
ui
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
iPod/USB
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
0
Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB
memory device.
0
Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards
can be played on this unit.
0
This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
0
The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
See “Playback a USB memory device” for details. (v
p. 283)
0
WMA
0
MP3
0
WAV
0
MPEG-4 AAC
0
FLAC
0
ALAC
0
AIFF
0
DSD
0
JPEG
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
82
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
1
Connect the USB memory device to the USB port.
(v p. 65)
2
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
.
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
OPTION
OPTION
USB [1/9]
Option
3
Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.
Playback starts.
Operation buttons
Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u i
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE d f
Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
0
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while
playing the file.
0
This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.
NOTE
Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the
data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory
device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
83
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
0
“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 118)
0
“Performing random playback” (v p. 118)
0
“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v
p. 120)
0
“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 121)
0
“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v
p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 125)
0
“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v
p. 126)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
84
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
OPTION
OPTION
ENTER
ENTER
BACK
BACK
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
BACK
OPTION
Bluetooth
ui
ENTER
Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital
music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting
this unit with the Bluetooth device.
Communication is possible up to a range of about 10 m.
NOTE
To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support
the A2DP profile.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
85
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Pairing with a Bluetooth device
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth
device must first be paired with this unit.
Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired
again.
1
Prepare for playback.
A
Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
on the rear panel. (v p. 22)
B
Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
2
Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to
“Bluetooth”.
.
OPTION
OPTION
Bluetooth
Music
Device
Now Playing
Artist
Album
Option
When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode
automatically and “Pairing...” will appear on the display of the unit.
3
Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.
0
Connect to the Bluetooth device while “Pairing” is being displayed
on the display of the unit.
Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit
(about 1 m).
0
When connecting a second Bluetooth device, press and hold Bluetooth for
approximately 3 seconds or select “Pairing Mode” from the options menu to pair
the device. (v p. 89)
0
This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th
Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered
device.
0
When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same
number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
0
Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
86
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing a Bluetooth device
Check the following before you play back music.
0
The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth device must be turned on
0
Pairing must be completed
1
Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to
“Bluetooth”.
The unit will automatically connect to the most recently used
Bluetooth device.
2
Start playing the Bluetooth device.
0
The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote
control of this unit.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u i
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0
When the power of this unit is turned on, the input source will be automatically
switched to “Bluetooth” if a Bluetooth device is connected.
0
When the “IP Control” setting of this unit is set to “Always On” and a Bluetooth
device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be
turned on automatically. (v p. 235)
0
Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title
name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
0
English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
87
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
NOTE
0
To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth
device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0
The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
0
Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
0
“Pairing with the Pairing Mode” (v p. 89)
0
“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 118)
0
“Performing random playback” (v
p. 118)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v
p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v
p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 125)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v
p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
88
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Pairing with the Pairing Mode
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Bluetooth”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Pairing Mode”, then press ENTER.
The device will go into the pairing mode.
3
Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.
0
When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same
number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
0
Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
89
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
ENTER
ENTER
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
TUNER
TUNER
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
OPTION
OPTION
BACK
BACK
ENTER
ENTER
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
0 – 9
BACK
OPTION
TUNE +,
–
TUNER
df
You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and
AM broadcasts.
Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this
unit first.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
90
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
1
Connect the antenna. (“Connecting an FM/AM
antenna” (v p. 67))
2
Press TUNER to switch the input source to “Tuner”.
G TV screen H
.
TUNE+/-
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH /
CH /
OPTION
OPTION
Tuner
FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
CH 1
G Display of this unit H
.
01 FM 87.50MHz
3
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.
This displays the reception band input screen.
5
Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.
FM: When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM: When listening to an AM broadcast.
6
Press TUNE + or TUNE - to select the station you want
listen to.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When
it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.
The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically
searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in using
buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also use
“Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good.
If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” mode to tune in.
Operation buttons Function
TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)
CH/PAGE d f
Selects preset radio stations
0 – 9
Preset channel selection /
Direct frequency tuning
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
91
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
0
“Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)” (v p. 93)
0
“RDS search” (v p. 93)
0
“PTY search” (v
p. 94)
0
“TP search” (v p. 95)
0
“Radio Text” (v
p. 95)
0
“Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)” (v p. 96)
0
“Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)” (v
p. 96)
0
“Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset
Memory)” (v
p. 97)
0
“Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset
Name)” (v
p. 98)
0
“Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)” (v p. 99)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v
p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v
p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 125)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
92
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Tuning in by entering the frequency
(Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3
Use ui or 0 – 9 to select a number and press p.
0
If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4
Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio
station you want to hear.
5
When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
RDS search
RDS is a broadcasting service which allows a station to send additional
information along with the regular radio program signal.
Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide the RDS
service.
Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible
stations.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “RDS Search”, then press ENTER.
3
Press ENTER.
The search for RDS stations begins automatically.
If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the
display, you can search for a different station.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
93
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
PTY search
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program
type (PTY).
PTY identifies the type of RDS program.
The program types and their displays are as follows:
NEWS
News
WEATHER
Weather
AFFAIRS
Current Affairs
FINANCE
Finance
INFO
Information
CHILDREN
Children’s program
SPORT
Sports
SOCIAL
Social Affairs
EDUCATE
Education
RELIGION
Religion
DRAMA
Drama
PHONE IN
Phone In
CULTURE
Culture
TRAVEL
Travel
SCIENCE
Science
LEISURE
Leisure
VARIED
Varied
JAZZ
Jazz Music
POP M
Pop Music
COUNTRY
Country Music
ROCK M
Rock Music
NATION M
National Music
EASY M
Easy Listening Music
OLDIES
Oldies Music
LIGHT M
Light Classical
FOLK M
Folk Music
CLASSICS
Serious Classical
DOCUMENT
Documentary
OTHER M
Other Music
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “PTY Search”, then press ENTER.
3
Use ui to call out the desired program type.
4
Press ENTER.
PTY search begins automatically.
If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the
display, you can search for a different station.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
94
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TP search
TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.
This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area
before leaving home.
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic programs (TP
stations).
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “TP Search”, then press ENTER.
3
Press ENTER.
TP search begins automatically.
If you use o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is shown on the
display, you can search for a different station.
Radio Text
RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display.
“Radio text” appears on the display when radio text data is received.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Radio text”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select “On”, then press ENTER.
0
While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data
broadcast from the station is displayed.
0
If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
95
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you
cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, change the mode to
“Manual” and tune in manually.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.
Auto:
Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio
station.
Manual:
Manually change the frequency one step at a time each
time the button is pressed.
Tuning in to stations and presetting
them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)
A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
3
Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset
them.
0
When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about
5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
The preset memory is overwritten.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
96
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Presetting the current broadcast
station (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them
in easily.
Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
(“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 91))
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4
Use ui or 0 – 9 to select the channel you want to
preset, then press ENTER.
The current broadcast station that is preset.
0
To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Channel Default settings
1 – 8
87.50 / 89.10 / 98.10 / 108.00 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
9 – 16
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
17 – 24
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
25 – 32
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
33 – 40
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
41 – 48
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
49 – 56
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10
MHz
Listening to preset stations
1
Use CH/PAGE df or 0 – 9 to select the desired preset
channel.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
97
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Specify a name for the preset
broadcast station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.
Up to eight characters can be input.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.
The Preset Name screen is displayed.
3
Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station
you want to name.
4
Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
name, then press ENTER.
5
Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.
0
If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the
frequency.
6
Enter the characters, then press “OK”.
0
For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v
p. 163).
7
Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
98
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip)
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can
be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier
by skipping unnecessary memories.
1
Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.
The “Preset Skip” screen is displayed.
3
n
To set the stations you want to skip by groups
A
Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to
skip.
B
Press u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press ENTER.
Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the
selected group “z-z”.
(z is the selected group number.)
n
To set the stations you want to skip by
stations
A
Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want
to skip.
B
Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
C
Use o p to select “Skip”.
The station you selected is not displayed.
4
Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
99
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Cancelling Preset Skip
1
Use o p to select a group containing a broadcast
station to cancel the skip for while the “Preset Skip ”
screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip
for.
3
Use o p to select “On”.
The skip is cancelled.
NOTE
Preset skip cannot be cancelled for groups.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
100
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to Internet Radio
.
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
TUNER
TUNER
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
OPTION
OPTION
BACK
BACK
ENTER
ENTER
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
INTERNET
RADIO
ONLINE
MUSIC
1
2
0
Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0
The Internet radio station list on this unit the database service provided
by vTuner radio station.
0
The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows.
See “Playing an Internet Radio Station” (v p. 286) for details.
0
WMA
0
MP3
0
MPEG-4 AAC
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
101
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Listening to Internet Radio
1
Prepare for playback.
0
Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 69))
2
Press ONLINE MUSIC.
0
You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source
“Internet Radio” directly.
3
Use uio p to select “Internet Radio”, then press
ENTER.
.
Favorites Internet Radio
Online Music
Media Server
4
Use ui to select the search method for the radio
station that you wish to playback and then press
ENTER.
Name of country:
Select the various regions.
Displays typical Internet Radio stations.
Search Stations :
Displays all Internet Radio stations that this
unit can tune in to.
Search Podcasts :
Displays Internet Radio stations in the
podcasts that this unit can tune in to.
Recommended
Stations :
Displays recommended Internet Radio
stations.
radiodenon.com :
Displays Internet Radio stations added to
favorites in vTuner. For instructions on how
to add to favorites in vTuner, see “Using
vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to
favorites” (v p. 104).
Recently Played :
Displays recently played Internet Radio
stations. Up to 20 stations can be stored in
“Recently Played”.
Search by Keyword :
Displays Internet Radio stations searched
by keyword. For character input, see
“Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 163).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
102
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
5
Use ui p to select the station, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
2
Stop
ENTER (Press and hold) Stop
CH/PAGE d f
Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
0
The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0
Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
NOTE
The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.
Playing the last played Internet Radio
station
1
Press INTERNET RADIO.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and the last played radio
station plays.
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
0
“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 120)
0
“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 121)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v
p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v
p. 125)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
103
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites
There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune
into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may be
difficult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then
please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically
designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio
stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations
added to vTuner.
1
Check the MAC address of this unit.
(“Information” (v p. 231))
0
The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for
vTuner.
2
Use your PC to access the vTuner website (http://
www.radiodenon.com).
3
Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.
4
Enter your E-mail address and a password of your
choice.
5
Select the search criteria (genre, region, language,
etc.) of your choice.
0
You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to
hear.
6
Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and
then click the Add to Favorites icon.
7
Enter the name of the favorite group, then click “Go”.
A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is
created.
0
Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played
from “radiodenon.com” with this unit. (v p. 102)
You can also add a radio station that is not in the vTuner list.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
104
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
OPTION
OPTION
BACK
BACK
ENTER
ENTER
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
ONLINE
MUSIC
1
8
9
6
7
3
2
0
This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a
PC and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.
0
The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server
using technologies shown below.
Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
0
The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
For details, see “Playing back a file saved on a PC or
NAS” (v
p. 285).
0
WMA
0
MP3
0
WAV
0
MPEG-4 AAC
0
FLAC
0
ALAC
0
AIFF
0
DSD
0
JPEG
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
105
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Applying media sharing settings
Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.
If you are using a Media Server, be sure to apply this setting first.
.
o
When using Windows Media Player 12
(Windows 7 / Windows 8)
1
Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC.
2
Select “More streaming options...” in the “Stream”.
3
Select “Allowed” in the “Denon AVR-X5200W” drop-
down list.
4
Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media
programs on this PC and remote connections...”.
5
Follow the screen instructions to end the setting.
o
When using Windows Media Player 11
1
Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
2
Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.
3
Click the “Share my media” check box, select “Denon
AVR-X5200W”, and then click “Allow”.
4
As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other
PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media
controller, and then click “Allow”.
5
Click “OK” to finish.
o
Sharing media stored in NAS
Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs
and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For
details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
106
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back files stored on a PC and
NAS
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1
Prepare for playback.
A
Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 69))
B
Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)
2
Press ONLINE MUSIC.
3
Use uio p to select “Media Server”, then press
ENTER.
.
Favorites Internet Radio
Online Music
Media Server
4
Use ui to select the server including the file to be
played, then press ENTER.
5
Use iu p to select the file, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
3
Pause
2
Stop
8 9
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER
Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u i
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE d f
Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
107
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album
art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0
If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files
can be displayed.
0
WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding,
such as Windows Media Player (Ver.11 or later).
0
This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.
NOTE
0
When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless
LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In
this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0
Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required
for the file to be displayed.
0
The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server
specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the
server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
0
“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 118)
0
“Performing random playback” (v p. 118)
0
“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v
p. 120)
0
“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 121)
0
“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v
p. 123)
0
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 124)
0
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 125)
0
“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v
p. 126)
0
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 127)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
108
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
OPTION
OPTION
BACK
BACK
ENTER
ENTER
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
uio
p
ENTER
CH/PAGE
df
BACK
OPTION
1
2
ONLINE
MUSIC
0
Flickr is an online photo sharing service. You can use this unit to view
photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not
need an account to use Flickr.
To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account
in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.
For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.flickr.com/
0
You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
109
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Viewing photographs shared by
particular users
1
Prepare for playback.
0
Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 69))
2
Press ONLINE MUSIC.
3
Use uio p to select “Flickr”, then press ENTER.
.
Favorites Internet Radio
Online Music
Media Server
4
Use ui to select “Add Flickr Contact”, then press
ENTER.
5
Enter the screen name that you wish to add to
“Contact” (Screen Name: User name you wish to view).
0
For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 163).
6
After inputting the “Contact”, press “OK”.
The screen name is added to “Contact”, and the screen name you
entered in step 5 is displayed on the top screen of Flickr.
0
If you enter a screen name that does not exist, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” is displayed. Check and enter
the correct screen name.
7
Use ui to select the screen name added to “Contact”,
then press ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
110
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
8
Use ui to select the folder, then press ENTER.
Favorites :
Displays the favorite photographs of the
specified user.
Photostream : Displays a list of shared photographs.
PhotoSets : Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts :
Displays the screen name used by the
specified user in Contacts.
Remove this
Contact :
Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
Add this Contact : Adds a user from Flickr Contact.
9
Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.
The selected photograph is displayed.
Operation buttons Function
1
Playback
2
Stop
ENTER
Playback
(Press and hold) Stop
u i
Display previous photograph / Display next
photograph
CH/PAGE d f
Switch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
111
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Viewing all photographs on Flickr
1
Use ui to select “All Content”, then press ENTER.
2
Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER.
Interestingness :
Displays photographs that are popular from the
number of user comments or number of times
they are added as favorites.
Recent : Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text : Search for photographs by keyword.
3
Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.
The selected photograph is displayed.
NOTE
Depending on the file format, some photographs may not be viewable.
o
Operations accessible through the option
menu
0
“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 122)
0
“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 126)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
112
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be
played on this unit via the network.
0
+ is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated.
0
Source input will be switched to “Online Music” when AirPlay playback is started.
0
You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing o or choosing other input source.
0
To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
0
For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
0
The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
.
This unit
Router
PC
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
113
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod
touch or iPad
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can
stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.
1
Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the
same network as this unit.
0
For details, see your device’s manual.
2
Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.
' is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3
Tap the AirPlay icon '.
.
AirPlay
AirPlay
AirDrop
AirDrop
4
Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.
Playing iTunes music with this unit
1
Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that
is connected to the same network as this unit.
2
Turn this unit ON.
Set “IP Control” to “Always On” for this unit. (v p. 235)
NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby
power.
3
Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' to select the
main unit.
.
4
Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
114
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible
speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.
1
Click the AirPlay icon ' and select “Multiple”.
2
Check the speakers you want to use.
NOTE
In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod touch,
iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to
playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
Perform iTunes playback operations
with the remote control unit of this unit
With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,
pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
1
Select the “Edit” - “Preferences...” in the iTunes menu.
2
Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
3
Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers”, and then click “OK”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
115
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Spotify Connect function
Spotify is the world’s most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to
Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or
tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or
use other apps - the music never stops.
To try Spotify Premium free for 30 days, or learn more about Connect,
please go to www.spotify.com/connect.
.
Spotify server
Control
This unit
Spotify App
Audio streaming/control
Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the “Spotify App” onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.
To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify
premium account first.
1
Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device
in the same network as this unit.
2
Launch the Spotify App.
3
Play back the Spotify track.
4
Tap the F icon to select the unit.
.
4:440:13
The music will stream to this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
116
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Convenience functions
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
OPTION
OPTION
ENTER
ENTER
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
BACK
BACK
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
uio
p
ENTER
OPTION
ONLINE
MUSIC
This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for
each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
117
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Performing repeat playback
n
Supported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Bluetooth
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
Off
(Default):
Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One:
A file being played is played
repeatedly.
All:
All files in the folder currently being
played are played repeatedly.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0
This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the repeat setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0
“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.
Performing random playback
n
Supported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Bluetooth
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select random playback mode.
Off
(Default):
Disable random playback.
On:
Randomly play back all tracks in the
current playback folder.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0
During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another
track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0
This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the random setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0
“Random” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
118
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Registering to Favorites
You can register a total of 100 favorites.
o
Supported input sources:
Internet Radio / Media Server
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Save to Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added to
favorites.
0
The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is
completed.
Playing back content added to the
“Save to Favorites”
1
Press ONLINE MUSIC.
2
Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
.
Internet Radio
Media Server
Online Music
Favorites
3
Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.
Playback starts.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
119
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Deleting content added to favorites
1
Press ONLINE MUSIC.
2
Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
3
Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Remove from Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is deleted
from favorites.
0
The screen returns to the previous screen when the delete
process is complete.
Searching content with keywords (Text
Search)
n
Supported input sources :
USB / Internet Radio / Media Server
1
While the content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.
The keyboard input screen is displayed.
3
Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or
file you want to search for, and then press “OK”.
0
For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 163).
4
Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.
Playback starts.
“Text Search” searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the entered
first character from the displayed list.
NOTE
Text Search may not work for some lists.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
120
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
n
Supported input sources : USB
1
Play back a still picture.
0
Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices.
(v p. 83)
2
Play back a music file. (v p. 83)
3
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.
n
Supported input sources :
Internet Radio / Media Server
1
Play back a still picture.
0
Play back still pictures stored on Media Server. (v p. 105)
0
Play back still pictures stored on Flickr. (v p. 109)
2
Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio
station. (v p. 101, 105)
3
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
121
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting the Slideshow Interval
Set the playback interval when playing back a slideshow of still picture
(JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device or media server, or on the
Flickr website.
n
Supported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Flickr
1
While the list is displayed, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Slideshow Interval”, then press
ENTER.
3
Use o p to set the display time.
Off: The slide show is not played back.
5s - 60s
(Default: 5s):
Set the time for displaying a single picture when
playing back images in the slide show.
4
Press ENTER.
The “Slideshow Interval” settings are reflected for all input sources.
Adjusting the audibility of dialog and
vocals (Dialog Enhancer)
This function adjusts the center channel frequency band to enhance the
dialog in the movies and vocals in music for easier listening.
1
Press OPTION.
2
Use ui to select “Dialog Enhancer”, then press
ENTER.
3
Use o p to select your favorite enhancement effect.
Off
(Default):
Does not enhance the dialog or
vocals.
Low / Medium / High: Enhances the dialog and vocals.
4
Press ENTER.
“Dialog Enhancer” settings are stored for each source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
122
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the volume of each channel
to match the input source (Channel
Level Adjust)
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You
can set this for each input source.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press
ENTER.
The channel level adjust screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.
4
Use o p to adjust the volume.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
0
Select “Reset” and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of
the various channels to “0.0 dB” (default).
0
Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
0
“Channel Level Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0
You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”. (v
p. 180)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
123
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the tone (Tone)
Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.
The Tone screen is displayed.
3
Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.
On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
Off
(Default):
Playback without tone adjustment.
4
Select “On” in step 3 and press i to select the sound
range to be adjusted.
Bass: Adjust bass.
Treble: Adjust treble.
5
Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.
-6 dB – +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)
0
“Tone” settings are stored for each input source.
0
This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0
This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v
p. 172)
0
You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu “HDMI Audio Out”
is set to “TV”. (v p. 180)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
124
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Displaying your desired video during
audio playback (Video Select)
This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio
playback. You can set this for each input source.
n
Supported input sources:
iPod/USB / CD
z
/ Tuner / Online Music /
Bluetooth / Phono
z
This cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video
connectors are assigned.
1
Press OPTION during audio playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
Off
(Default):
Disable Video Select mode.
On: Enable Video Select mode.
4
If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select
“Source”.
5
Use o p to select the input source for video you want
to play back, then press ENTER.
“Video Select” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
125
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Adjusting the picture quality for your
viewing environment (Picture Mode)
n
Supported input sources :
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 /
AUX2 / Media Player / iPod/USB /
Online Music / CD
z
/ TV Audio
z
z
You can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video
connector is assigned.
1
Press OPTION during video playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.
3
Use o p to select picture mode.
Off: No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Standard:
The standard mode suited for most living room
viewing environments.
Movie:
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room
such as a theater room.
Vivid:
A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.
brighter and more vivid.
Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day:
A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room
during the day.
ISF Night:
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at
night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
4
Press ENTER.
“Picture Mode” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
126
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing the same music in all zones (All
Zone Stereo)
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE
simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (other rooms).
It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in
multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same
BGM in the entire house.
1
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
3
Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
0
The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the
same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the
All Zone Stereo mode.
0
When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All
Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then
press “Start”.
o
Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode
1
During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press
OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
3
Select “Stop”, then press ENTER.
0
The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN
ZONE is turned off.
0
In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the “Multi Ch Stereo” and “Stereo” sound modes
can be selected.
0
When “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available.
(v
p. 180)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
127
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Selecting a sound mode
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
OPTION
OPTION
ENTER
ENTER
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
BACK
BACK
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
PUREMOVIE
MUSIC GAME
ui
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo
playback modes.
Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by
digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from
internet-based subscription services.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than
multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
128
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Selecting a sound mode
1
Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.
MOVIE :
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies
and TV programs.
MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.
0
The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for
its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as
the one selected at the previous playback.
0
If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,
the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
o
Switching the sound mode
0
Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes
that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME,
the sound mode changes.
0
While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound
mode.
0
Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite
mode.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
.
MOVIE SOUND
Stereo
Dolby Surround
DTS Neo:X Cinema
Multi Ch Stereo
Mono Movie
Virtual
This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats
recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS, but also extended types of
modes that match your speaker configuration and “original sound modes”
that create atmosphere of Rock Arena and Jazz Club, etc.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
129
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1
Press PURE to select “Direct”.
Direct playback begins.
While DSD signals are played back, “DSD Direct” is displayed.
Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback
mode.
This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing
so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
1
Press PURE to select “Pure Direct”.
The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0
Tone (v p. 124)
0
Restorer (v p. 169)
0
MultEQ
®
XT32 (v p. 171)
0
Dynamic EQ (v p. 172)
0
Dynamic Volume (v
p. 173)
0
Graphic EQ (v p. 175)
NOTE
0
Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct
mode.
0
When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5
seconds.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
130
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically
selects the corresponding mode for playback.
Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input
signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the
respective channel number.
1
Press PURE to select “Auto”.
Auto surround playback begins.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
131
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Description of sound mode types
Dolby sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Dolby Surround This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.
Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Dolby Digital This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital.
Dolby TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.
Dolby Digital Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus.
Dolby Atmos This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with Dolby Atmos.
It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers,
creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Enabled speakers to
realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
132
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
DTS sound mode
Sound mode type Description
DTS Neo:X This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel
surround sources as a maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound.
The “Music” mode is suitable for playing music, the “Cinema” mode is suitable for playing movies and the “Game” mode is
suitable for playing games.
DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES Dscrt6.1
z
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES Mtrix6.1
z
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software
recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,
surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
zThis can be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”. (v p. 221)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
133
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
PCM multi-channel sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.
Audyssey DSX
®
sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Audyssey DSX
®
(A-DSX)
z
This mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in 5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide
or front height channels, the surround sound effects sound become more three dimensional and realistic.
z
This can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”, and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in “Speaker
Config.”. (v p. 220)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
134
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Original sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Stereo audio (2-channel) sources are played back via the front (L/R) speakers, the surround speakers and surround back
speakers (if connected).
Rock Arena This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena.
Jazz Club This mode simulates the experience of being in an intimate jazz club.
Mono Movie This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound effect. For optimum channel balance and
surround sound effects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs.
Video Game This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound effect with your favorite action video games.
Matrix This mode adds a spacious surround sound effect with stereo music sources.
Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)
speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
Auto sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Auto In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DolbyDigital EX,
DTS, DTS-HD, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the
corresponding mode.
If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played
back according to the respective channel number.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
135
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Stereo sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.
0
Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.
0
When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Direct sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.
Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.
The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.
0
Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)
0
The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
136
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0
The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.
0
Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 164)
Input signal Sound mode
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
2-channel
z
1
Dolby Surround
S S S
DTS Neo:X Cinema
z
2
S
DTS Neo:X Music
z
2
S
DTS Neo:X Game
z
2
S S
Multi Ch Stereo
S S S
Mono Movie
S
Rock Arena
S
Jazz Club
S
Matrix
S
Video Game
S
Virtual
S S S
z1
2-channel also includes analog input.
z2
This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1 or 9.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
137
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Input signal Sound mode
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel
z
3
Stereo
S S S
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
S S S
Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround
S S S
Dolby Digital A-DSX
z
4
S S S
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Cinema
S
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Music
S
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Game
S
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD
S S S
Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround
z
5
S S S
Dolby Atmos
z
6
S S S
Dolby TrueHD A-DSX
z
4
S S S
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Cinema
S
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Music
S
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Game
S
z3
Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 292).
z4
These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX
®
processing. (v p. 174)
z5
This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z6
This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
138
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Input signal Sound mode
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel
z
3
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus
S S S
Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround
z
5
S S S
Dolby Atmos
z
6
S S S
Dolby Digital Plus A-DSX
z
4
S S S
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Cinema
S
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Music
S
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Game
S
Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos
S S S
DTS
DTS Surround
S S S
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1
S S S
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1
S S S
DTS 96/24
S S S
DTS + Dolby Surround
S S S
DTS Surround A-DSX
z
4
S S S
DTS + Neo:X Cinema
S
DTS + Neo:X Music
S
DTS + Neo:X Game
S
z3
Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 292).
z4
These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX
®
processing. (v p. 174)
z5
This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z6
This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
139
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Input signal Sound mode
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel
z
3
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD Hi Res
S S S
DTS-HD Mstr
S S S
DTS-HD Mstr A-DSX
z
4
S S S
DTS Express
S S S
DTS Express A-DSX
z
4
S S S
DTS-HD + Dolby Surround
S S S
DTS-HD HI Res A-DSX
z
4
S S
DTS-HD + Neo:X Cinema
S
DTS-HD + Neo:X Music
S S
DTS-HD + Neo:X Game
S
PCM multi-channel
Multi Ch In
S S S
Multi Ch In 7.1
S S S
Multi In + Dolby Surround
S S S
Multi In A-DSX
z
4
S S S
Multi In + Neo:X Cinema
S
Multi In + Neo:X Music
S
Multi In + Neo:X Game
S
z3
Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 292).
z4
These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX
®
processing. (v p. 174)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
140
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Input signal Sound mode
Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel
z
3
Multi Ch Stereo
S S S
Mono Movie
S
Rock Arena
S
Jazz Club
S
Matrix
S
Video Game
S
Virtual
S S S
z3
Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v
p. 292).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
141
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Views on the display
.
Dolby D + S
Blu-ray
q w
A
Shows a decoder to be used.
0
In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, “Dolby D +” is
displayed.
B
Shows a decoder that creates sound output.
0
“k” indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
142
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
HDMI control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with
another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure
1
Enable the HDMI control function of this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On”. (v p. 181)
2
Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.
3
Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected
by HDMI cable.
0
Please consult the operating instructions for the connected
devices to check the settings.
0
Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4
Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected
to this unit.
5
Switch the input source of this unit to check that video
from the player connected by HDMI is played back
correctly.
6
When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that
the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE
0
Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.
0
The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI control function.
0
When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with “HDMI Control” in the menu set to
“On”, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
143
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sleep timer function
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
WXYZ
WXYZ
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
MAIN
MAIN
SLE
EP
EP
SLEEP
MAIN
Z2
Z3
You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time
has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to
sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
144
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Using the sleep timer
1
Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with
the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2
Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
0
The B indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer
starts.
0
You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in
steps of 10 minutes.
o
Checking the remaining time
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.
The remaining time appears on the display.
o
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select “Off”.
The B indicator on the display turns off.
The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE
The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this unit.
To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the
connected devices themselves.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
145
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Quick select plus function
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
1 2 3 4
QUICK
SELECT
1 – 4
MAIN
Z2
Z3
Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be
registered to the QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the registered QUICK SELECT buttons in
subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.
By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 buttons,
you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
The Quick Select Plus function can be memorized for each zone.
The QUICK SELECT button on this unit can only be used to operate the MAIN
ZONE.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
146
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Calling up the settings
1
Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with
the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2
Press QUICK SELECT.
The Quick Select settings registered to the button you pressed are
called up.
0
The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown
below.
GMAIN ZONEH
Button Input source Volume
QUICK SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40
QUICK SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40
QUICK SELECT 3 Media Player 40
QUICK SELECT 4 Online Music 40
GZONE2H / GZONE3H
Button Input source Volume
QUICK SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40
QUICK SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40
QUICK SELECT 3 Media Player 40
QUICK SELECT 4 Online Music 40
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
147
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Changing the settings
1
Set the items below to the settings you want to
register.
The following settings from A to I can be memorized for MAIN
ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and
ZONE3.
A
Input source (v p. 75)
B
Volume (v p. 76)
C
Sound mode (v
p. 128)
D
Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
, Audyssey LFC™) (v
p. 171 -
173)
E
“Restorer” (v p. 169)
F
“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 123)
G
“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v
p. 125)
H
“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment
(Picture Mode)” (v p. 126)
I
“Video Output” (v p. 180)
Press and hold QUICK SELECT while a radio station is being received or a
track is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio
station or track is memorized.
0
Tuner / Internet Radio / Media Server / Favorites / iPod/USB
2
Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with
the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
3
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until
“Quickz Memory”, “Z2 Quickz Memory” or “Z3 Quickz
Memory” appears on the display.
The current settings will be memorized.
z is displayed the number for the QUICK SELECT button you
pressed.
o
Changing the Quick Select Name
The MAIN ZONE Quick Select name displayed on the TV screen or
display of this unit can be changed to a different name.
For the name change method, see “Quick Select Names”.
(v p. 242)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
148
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
.
This unit
PC
Router
Tablet
0
This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in
order to use the web control function. (“Connecting to a home network
(LAN)” (v p. 69))
0
Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able
to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the
security-related software.
Controlling the unit from a web control
1
Switch the “IP Control” setting to “Always On”.
(v p. 235)
2
Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”.
(v p. 231)
.
Network/Information
Friendly name
DHCP
IP Address
MAC Address
Displays the current network settings of the AVR
Denon AVR-X5200W
On
192.168.100.19
Connection Wired (Ethernet)
zzzzzz-000000
Checking the IP address.
3
Start up the web browser.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
149
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
4
Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter
“http://192.168.100.19”.
.
http://192.168.100.19
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
5
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.
.
MAIN ZONE
CBL/SAT
ZONE2
Online Music
Load
AVR-X5200W
AVR-X5200W
Audio
Setup Menu
Video
Inputs
Speakers
Network
General
Save
ZONE3
CBL/SAT
0
You can use the “Save” and “Load” functions to store or recall various function
settings using web control from a PC.
0
To memorize settings, click “Save” on the Setup Menu screen.
0
To call up settings, click “Load” on the Setup Menu screen.
0
We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
Internet Explorer 10 and above
Mozilla Firefox 24 and above
Google Chrome 29 and above
Safari 5.x and above
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
150
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).
You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN
ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Connecting ZONE
You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0
Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector (v p. 151)
0
Connection through the video output connector and speaker output
connector (v p. 152)
0
Connection through the video output connector and external power
amplifiers (v
p. 154)
o
Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI
ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can
play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 –
7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).
.
HDMI
ZONE2
HDMI
ZONE2
MAIN ZONE
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE
and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed
down to 2-channel audio.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
151
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Connection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector
When “Assign Mode” in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 205)
n
Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2
.
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
B PR
IN
wq wwq
(L) (R)
ZONE2
or
This unit
MAIN ZONE
ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND BACK
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
MONITOR
VIDEO
ZONE2
n
Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3
.
wqwq
(L) (R)
ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND BACK
ZONE3
This unit
MAIN ZONE
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
152
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO
.
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPB PR
IN
wq
w q
ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND BACK
FRON
T
ZONE3ZONE2
or
This unit
MAIN ZONE
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
MONITOR
VIDEO
ZONE2
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
153
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Connection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.
.
R
L
R
L
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPB PR
IN
AUX IN
AUX IN
Power amplifier
ZONE3
ZONE2
or
This unit
MAIN ZONE
Power amplifier
ZONE2 ZONE3
PRE O
U
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR/ZONE2
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
MONITOR
VIDEO
ZONE2
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
154
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2.
0
If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set “HDMI Audio” to “PCM”. (v
p. 240) 2-channel PCM signals are output from a device
connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2.
In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on
the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.
0
The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3.
0
When “Component Video Out” in the menu is set to “ZONE2”, the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video. (v p. 187)
0
The menu screen is not output in ZONE2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
155
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MENU
MENU
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
POWER
POWER
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
PHONO
PHONO
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
INP
INPUT
VOLUME
VOLUME
MUTE
MUTE
VOLUME
df
POWER
X
Z2
Z3
MUTE
:
Input source
select buttons
1
Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the zone mode.
Z2 or Z3 lights.
2
Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The j indicator on the display lights.
0
Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3
Press the input source select button to select the input
source to be played.
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
0
To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2
SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2
SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE, the input source changes.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
156
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Adjusting the volume
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0
At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “70 (–10 dB)”.
(v
p. 241)
Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE
on the main unit to adjust the volume.
o
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
Press MUTE :.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu.
(v p. 241)
0
To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :
again.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
157
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Menu map
When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.
The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
Audio
Subwoofer Level Adjust This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer. 164
Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters. 164
Restorer Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as
MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.
169
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 170
Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting. 170
Audyssey
Set Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
, Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
,
Audyssey LFC
TM
and Audyssey DSX
®
.
171
Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 175
.
Video
Picture Adjust Adjusts picture quality. 177
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output. 179
Output Settings Makes settings for video output. 183
Component Video Out Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2. 187
On Screen Display Configures the on-screen display settings. 188
TV Format Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. 189
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Settings
158
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
Inputs
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 190
Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 192
Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 192
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 192
Input Select Sets the audio input mode and decode mode. 193
.
Speakers
Audyssey
®
Setup
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are
measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.
194
Manual Setup
Sets up the speakers manually or changes the Audyssey
®
Setup settings.
205
.
Network
Information Displays network information. 231
Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 231
Settings Used for manually setting the IP address or when using a proxy server. 234
IP Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. 235
Friendly Name The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change
the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
236
Diagnostics Used to check the network connection. 236
Maintenance Mode Used when receiving maintenance from a Denon service engineer or custom installer.
This mode is not designed for use by the end user, and should only be used by a trained
service technician or custom installation professional.
237
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
159
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
General
Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 238
ECO Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 238
ZONE2 Setup/
ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3. 240
Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 242
Quick Select Names Changes the Quick Select Name display title to one you prefer. 242
Trigger Out 1/
Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. 242
Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit. 243
Information Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. 243
Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon. 245
Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the
firmware, and sets up the notification message display.
246
Setup Lock Protects settings from inadvertent changes. 248
.
Setup Assistant
Begin Setup... Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the
guidance indicated on the TV screen.
Page 9 of
the separate
manual
“Quick Start
Guide”
Language Select Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.
Speaker Setup
Speaker Calibration
Network Setup
Input Setup
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
160
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
VOLUME
VOLUME
INFO
INFO
SETUP
SETUP
MENU
MENU
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1
1 2 3 4
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
. /
. /
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
ENTER
ENTER
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
BACK
BACK
OPTION
OPTION
uio
p
ENTER
SETUP
MAIN
BACK
0 – 9
Menu operations
1
Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the
operating zone to the MAIN ZONE.
The MAIN button lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated,
then press ENTER.
4
Use o p to change to desired setting.
5
Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0
To return to the previous item, press BACK.
0
Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
menu display disappears.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
161
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Inputting characters
0
On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer.
0
Preset Name (v p. 98)
0
Text Search (v
p. 120)
0
Source Rename (v p. 192)
0
Friendly Name (v p. 236)
0
Zone Rename (v p. 242)
0
Quick Select Names (v p. 242)
0
Character input for the network functions
0
The following two methods can be used for inputting characters.
0
Using the keyboard screen (v
p. 163)
0
Using the number buttons (v p. 163)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
162
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Using the keyboard screen
1
Display the screen for inputting characters.
GExampleH “Source Rename” screen
.
Inputs/Source Rename
Changes the display name for this source
CBL/SAT
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
‘
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
“
=
M
Z
#
>
CBL/SAT
Clear
Clear
Insert
Insert
Delete
Delete
a/A
a/A
Space
Space
Cancel
Cancel
O K
O K
2
Use uio p to select , or ..
3
Press ENTER to move the cursor to the character that
you wish to change.
0
Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one
character.
4
Select a character to be input with uio p then press
ENTER.
5
Repeat steps 2 - 4 to change the name.
6
Use uio p to select “OK”, then press ENTER.
Using the number buttons
1
When the keyboard screen is displayed, press 0 – 9.
The 10 key input screen is displayed.
2
Place the cursor at the character to be changed with
o p and press the number button (0 – 9) until the
desired character is displayed.
0
The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
.
1 . @ - _ / : ˜
A B C a b c 2
D E F d e f 3
G H I g h i 4
J K L j k l 5
M N O m n o 6
P Q R S p q r s 7
T U V t u v 8
W X Y Z w x y z 9
0
! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
z
+ ,
; < = > ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }
(Space)
3
Repeat step 2 to change the name then press ENTER to
register it.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
163
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Subwoofer Level Adjust
This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.
o
Subwoofer Level Adjust
Set whether to adjust the subwoofer level.
On:
Enables the adjustment of the subwoofer
level.
Off
(Default):
Disables the adjustment of the subwoofer
level.
o
Subwoofer 1 Level /Subwoofer 2 Level
These settings adjust the volume level for Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer
2.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your
preferences.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being
input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable
parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v
p. 289).
0
Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings
during playback.
0
“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
o
Cinema EQ
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce
possible harshness and improve clarity.
On:
“Cinema EQ” is used.
Off
(Default):
“Cinema EQ” is not used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
164
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Loudness Management
This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression” or
output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio
recorded in the disc.
On
(Default):
Outputs are given based on enabling the
settings made in “Dynamic Compression”
and “Dialog normalization function”
(v p. 243).
Off:
“Dynamic Compression” settings and
“Dialogue Normalization” are disabled,
and the signals on the disc are output as
is.
“Loudness Management” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD signal is input.
o
Dynamic Compression
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
Auto:
Automatic dynamic range compression
on/off control according to source.
Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.
Off: Dynamic range compression is always off.
0
“Dynamic Compression” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD signal is input.
0
The default setting is “Off”. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or
Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is “Auto”.
o
Low Frequency Effects
Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
-10 dB – 0 dB (Default : 0 dB)
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
values below.
0
Dolby Digital sources : 0 dB
0
DTS movie sources : 0 dB
0
DTS music sources: -10 dB
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
165
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Center Gain
Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to the front left
and right channels and widens the sound image in the front.
0.0 – 1.0
0
You can set this when the sound mode is set to DTS Neo:X.
0
The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front left and
right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the front.
o
Center Spread
Center spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front
speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is
optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content.
On:
Use “Center Spread”.
Off
(Default):
Do no use “Center Spread”.
You can set this when sound mode is Dolby Surround.
o
Delay Time
Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field
image.
0 ms – 300 ms (Default : 30 ms)
You can set this when the sound mode is “Matrix”.
o
Effect Level
Adjust the sound effect level of the current sound mode.
1 – 15 (Default : 10)
Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals
seems unnatural.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
166
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Room Size
Determine size of acoustic environment.
Small: Simulate acoustics of a small room.
Medium small:
Simulate acoustics of a medium-small
room.
Medium
(Default):
Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Medium large:
Simulate acoustics of a medium-large
room.
Large: Simulate acoustics of a large room.
“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.
o
Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
On
(Default):
The subwoofer is used.
Off: The subwoofer is not used.
You can set this when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Stereo” and in the menu
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 227)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
167
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Speaker Select
Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.
n
When the sound mode is “DTS Neo:X”.
Surround Back: Sound is output from the surround back speakers.
Height: Sound is output from the front height speakers.
Wide: Sound is output from the front wide speakers.
Back/Height:
Sound is output from the surround back and front
height speakers.
Back/Wide:
Sound is output from the surround back and front
wide speakers.
Height/Wide:
Sound is output from the front height and front wide
speakers.
This can be selected when using any of the surround back, front wide or front
height speakers.
n
When the sound mode is the original sound mode
Floor
(Default):
Plays back without height speakers.
Floor & Height: Plays back with height speakers.
Front:
Plays back only with speakers in front of the
surround speaker.
o
Set Defaults
The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
168
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Restorer
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio)
and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal
components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “Restorer”
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the
sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.
It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded
tonal range.
o
Mode
High:
Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak
highs (64 kbps and under).
Medium:
Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed
sources (96 kbps and under).
Low:
Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs
(96 kbps and over).
Off: Do no use “Restorer”.
0
This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
0
This item default setting for “Online Music”, “iPod/USB” and “Bluetooth” is
“Low”. All others are set to “Off”.
0
This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0
“Restorer” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
169
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audio Delay
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
0 ms – 200 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0
Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” is set to “Auto” or
“Game”. (v
p. 183)
0
“Audio Delay” settings are stored for each input source.
Volume
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
o
Scale
Set how volume is displayed.
0 - 98
(Default):
Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB:
Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB
to 18.0 dB.
“Scale” settings are reflected in all the zones.
o
Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (–20 dB) / 70 (–10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
Off (Default)
o
Power On Level
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last
(Default):
Use the memorized setting from the last
session.
Mute:
Always use the muting on condition when
power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79 dB – 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
o
Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
(Default):
The sound is muted entirely.
–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
170
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audyssey
Set Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
, Audyssey
Dynamic Volume
®
and Audyssey LFC™. These can be selected after
Audyssey
®
Setup has been performed.
For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see
“Explanation of terms” (v
p. 295).
0
“MultEQ
®
XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level Offset”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey LFC™”, “Containment Amount” and “Audyssey DSX
®
” settings are
stored for each input source.
0
When the sound mode is in the “Direct” or “Pure Direct” mode, “MultEQ
®
XT32”,
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings cannot be configured.
o
MultEQ
®
XT32
MultEQ
®
XT32 compensates for both time and frequency
characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey
®
Setup
measurement results. Selection is done from three types of
compensation curves. It is recommended that “Reference” is selected.
Reference
(Default):
Selects the default calibrated setting with
a slight roll off at high frequencies, which
is optimized for movies.
L/R Bypass:
Selects the reference setting, but
bypasses MultEQ
®
XT32 on the front left
and right speakers.
Flat:
Selects the calibrated setting which is
optimized for small rooms where your
listening position is closer to the
speakers.
Off :
Turn “MultEQ
®
XT32” equalizer off.
When the headphones are used, “MultEQ
®
XT32” is automatically set to “Off”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
171
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Dynamic EQ
Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is
decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Works with MultEQ
®
XT32.
On
(Default):
Use Dynamic EQ.
Off: Do not use Dynamic EQ.
When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone
Control” adjustment. (v p. 124)
o
Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
is referenced to the standard film mix level. It
makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround
envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film
content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets
from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.
0 dB (Film Reference)
(Default):
Optimized for content such as
movies.
5 dB :
Select this setting for content that has
a very wide dynamic range, such as
classical music.
10 dB :
Select this setting for jazz or other
music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be
selected for TV content as that is
usually mixed at 10 dB below film
reference.
15 dB :
Select this setting for pop/rock music
or other program material that is
mixed at very high listening levels
and has a compressed dynamic
range.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On”. (v p. 172)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
172
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Dynamic Volume
Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,
movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud
passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred
volume setting.
Heavy:
Most adjustment to softest and loudest
sounds.
Medium:
Medium adjustment to loudest and
softest sound.
Light:
Least adjustment to loudest and softest
sounds.
Off
(Default):
Do not use Dynamic Volume.
If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey
®
Setup”, the setting is
automatically changed to “Medium”. (v p. 194)
o
Audyssey LFC™
Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from
being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
On: Use “Audyssey LFC™”.
Off
(Default):
Do not use “Audyssey LFC™”.
o
Containment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings
if you have close neighbors.
1 – 7 (Default : 4)
This can be set when “Audyssey LFC™” in the menu is set to “On”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
173
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Audyssey DSX
®
Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new
channels.
Wide:
Turn on Audyssey DSX
®
processing for front wide
channel expansion.
Height:
Turn on Audyssey DSX
®
processing for front height
channel expansion.
Wides/Heights:
Turns on Audyssey DSX
®
processing for front wide
and front height channel expansion.
Off
(Default):
Do not set “Audyssey DSX
®
”.
0
“Audyssey DSX
®
” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front
wide speakers.
0
“Audyssey DSX
®
” is only valid when using a center speaker.
0
When 2-channel signals are being played back, “Audyssey DSX
®
” cannot be
used.
0
“Audyssey DSX
®
” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played
includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective
channels are played back using the input signals.
o
Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)
o
Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
174
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
0
Speakers for which “Graphic EQ” can be set differ according to the sound mode.
0
This can be set when the “MultEQ
®
XT32” is set to “Off”. (v
p. 171)
0
This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
o
Graphic EQ
Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.
On: Use the graphic equalizer.
Off
(Default):
Do not use the graphic equalizer.
o
Speaker Selection
Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all
speakers.
All: Adjust all speaker tones together.
Left/Right
(Default):
Adjust the left and right speaker tones
together.
Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.
o
Adjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Adjust the speaker
selected in “Speaker Selection”.
1. Select the speaker.
2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz /
16 kHz
3. Adjust the level.
–20.0 dB – +6.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63
Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
175
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Curve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in the Audyssey
®
Setup.
“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey
®
Setup has been performed.
o
Set Defaults
The “Graphic EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
176
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Video
Make video-related settings.
Picture Adjust
Picture quality can be adjusted.
0
Can be set when the “Video Conversion” setting is “On”. (v p. 184)
0
Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” is assigned for each input source.
(v p. 191)
0
“Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Saturation”, “Noise Reduction” and “Enhancer” can be
set when “Picture Mode” is set to “Custom”.
0
“Picture Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0
“Picture Adjust” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
o
Picture Mode
Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and
your viewing environment.
Standard:
The standard mode suited for most living room viewing
environments.
Movie:
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such
as a theater room.
Vivid:
A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.
brighter and more vivid.
Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day:
A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room
during the day.
ISF Night:
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at
night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
Off: No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
177
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
The two special adjustment modes, ISF Day and ISF Night, should be used by
a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation
conditions.
We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF-
certified technician.
0
These settings can also be configured using “Picture Mode” in the option
menu. (v p. 126)
0
The default settings are as follows.
0
For “Online Music” and “iPod/USB” input sources: Streaming
0
For input sources other than “Online Music” and “iPod/USB”: Off
o
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
o
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
o
Saturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
178
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Noise Reduction
Reduce overall video noise.
Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)
o
Enhancer
Emphasize picture sharpness.
0 – +12 (Default : 0)
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
NOTE
When “HDMI Pass Through” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more
standby power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
o
Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video
output.
On
(Default):
Correct automatically.
Off: Do not correct automatically.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
179
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output device.
AVR
(Default):
Play back through speakers connected to
the unit.
TV:
Play back through TV connected to the
unit.
0
When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio
setting. (“HDMI control function” (v
p. 143))
0
When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, audio is
output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.
o
Video Output
Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.
Auto(Dual)
(Default):
The presence of a TV connected to the
HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2
connector is detected automatically, and
that TV connection is used.
Monitor 1:
A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
1 connector is always used.
Monitor 2:
A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
2 connector is always used.
0
If both the HDMI MONITOR1 and HDMI MONITOR2 connectors are
connected and “Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a
resolution that is compatible with both TVs. When “Resolution” is not set to
“Auto”, video may not be output. In this case, set a resolution that is
compatible with both TVs. (v
p. 185)
0
You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in “HDMI
Monitor 1” and “HDMI Monitor 2”. (v
p. 244)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
180
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
HDMI Pass Through
Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in
standby power mode.
On:
Transmits the selected HDMI input
through the AV receiver’s HDMI output
when this unit is in standby power mode.
Off
(Default):
No HDMI signals are transmitted through
this unit’s HDMI output in standby power
mode.
o
HDMI Control
You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and
compatible with HDMI Control.
On: Use HDMI control function.
Off
(Default):
Do not use HDMI control function.
0
Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check
the settings.
0
Refer to “HDMI control function” for more information about the HDMI control
function. (v p. 143)
NOTE
If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
181
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Pass Through Source
Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.
Last
(Default):
The most recently used input source will
go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT / DVD /
Blu-ray / Game /
AUX1 / AUX2 /
Media Player / CD
z
:
Pass through the selected input source.
z
“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI
connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input
Assign” setting. (v p. 190)
“Pass Through Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or “HDMI
Pass Through” is set to “On”.
o
TV Audio Switching
Sets automatic switching to the “TV Audio” input when a TV connected
via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to the AVR.
On
(Default):
Select the “TV Audio” input automatically
when receiving a command from the TV.
Off:
Do not select the “TV Audio” input
automatically when receiving a command
from the TV.
“TV Audio Switching” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
o
Power Off Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
All
(Default):
If power to a connected TV is turned off
independently of the input source, power
to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video:
With an input source being selected that
is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or
“VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the
TV off, power to this unit is automatically
set to standby. (v p. 191)
Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
182
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Output Settings
Makes settings for video output.
0
Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” (v p. 191) is assigned for each
input source.
0
“Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler”
is set to anything other than “Off”.
0
“Output Settings” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
0
“Video Conversion”, “i/p Scaler”, “Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect
Ratio” settings are stored for each input source.
o
Video Mode
Configure the video processing method to match the type of video
content.
Auto
(Default):
Process video automatically based on
the HDMI content information.
Game:
Always process video for game content.
Minimize the video delay when the video
is delayed compared to the button
operations on the controller of the game
console.
Movie:
Perform image processing that is suitable
for contents other than games.
If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input
contents.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
183
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Video Conversion
The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with
the connected TV. (“Video conversion function” (v p. 281))
On
(Default):
The input video signal is converted.
Off: The input video signal is not converted.
o
i/p Scaler
Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p scaler processing.
i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the
value set in “Resolution”. (v p. 185)
n
When the input source is set other than to “iPod/
USB” and “Online Music”
Analog
(Default):
Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler
function for analog video signals.
Analog & HDMI:
Use i/p scaler function for analog and
HDMI video signal.
HDMI:
Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video
signals.
Off: Do not use i/p scaler function.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
184
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
When the input source is set to “iPod/USB” and
“Online Music”
On
(Default):
Use i/p scaler function.
Off: Do not use i/p scaler function.
0
“Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input
connector is assigned.
0
Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input
connector.
0
This function is not effective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D, sYCC601
color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer resolutions.
o
Resolution
Set the output resolution. You can set “Resolution” separately for
HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.
Auto
(Default):
The resolution supported by the TV
connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT
connector is detected automatically and
the appropriate output resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i /
720p / 1080p:24Hz / 4K /
4K(60/50) :
Set the output resolution.
0
When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog
video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v
p. 184)
0
When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in
24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the
resolution to “1080p”.
0
It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a
resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
185
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video
signal.
Auto
(Default):
The video signal is automatically
detected and the appropriate mode is
set.
Video: Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film:
Select mode suitable for video and 30-
frame film material playback.
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 184)
o
Aspect Ratio
Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
16:9
(Default):
Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 :
Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars
on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except
for 480p/576p output)
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 184)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
186
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.
MAIN ZONE
(Default):
Assigns the component video output connector
to MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2:
Assigns the component video output connector
to ZONE2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
187
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
On Screen Display
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
o
Volume
Sets where to display the volume level.
Bottom
(Default):
Display at the bottom.
Top: Display at the top.
Off: Turn display off.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed
captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.
o
Info
Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is
changed, or input source is switched.
On
(Default):
Shows the volume display.
Off: Does not show the volume display.
o
Now Playing
Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is
“Online Music”, “iPod/USB”, “Bluetooth” or “Tuner”.
Always On
(Default):
Show display continuously.
Auto Off:
Show display for 30 seconds after
operation.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
188
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
o
Format
PAL
(Default):
Select PAL output.
NTSC: Select NTSC output.
“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen
is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
1.
Press and hold the main unit’s o and p at the same time for at least 3
seconds.
“zVideo Format <PAL>” appears on the display.
2.
Use the main unit’s o or p and set the video signal format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture
will not be displayed properly.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
189
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the
audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the
input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a
connected device.
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio
input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input
connector and video input connector when connecting an input source
that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this
unit.
.
DIGITAL ANALOGHDMI COMP VIDEO
Inputs/Input Assign
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
Game
Media Player
TV Audio
AUX1
AUX2
1
2
3
4
5
-
Front
6
1
2
3
4
6
-
Front
-
1
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
4
-
-
Front
-
COAX1
COAX2
-
-
-
OPT1
-
-
Changes HDMI input assignments
CD - 5 - -
OPT2
By default, each item is set as follows.
Input source
Input connector
HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP VIDEO
CBL/SAT 1 COAX1 1 1 1
DVD 2 COAX2 2 2 2
Blu-ray 3 – 3 – 3
Game 4 – 4 – 4
Media Player 5 – 6 – –
TV Audio – OPT1 – – –
AUX1 Front – Front – Front
AUX2 6 – – – –
CD – OPT2 5 – –
n
TV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box:
To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign” - “DIGITAL”, you will also need to
select “Digital” in the “Input Mode”. (v p. 193)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
190
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input
sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 /
7 / Front:
Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected
input source.
– :
Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the
selected input source.
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the menu, “HDMI” cannot be assigned to
“TV Audio”. (v p. 181)
o
DIGITAL
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
COAX1 (Coaxial) /
COAX2 /
OPT1 (Optical) /
OPT2:
Assign a digital audio input connector to the
selected input source.
– :
Do not assign a digital audio input connector
to the selected input source.
o
ANALOG
Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 /
Front:
Assign a analog audio input connector to the
selected input source.
– :
Do not assign a analog audio input connector to
the selected input source.
o
COMP (Component video)
Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2:
Assign the component video input connector to the selected
input source.
– :
Do not assign a component video input connector to the
selected input source.
o
VIDEO
Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 /
Front:
Assign the video input connector to the selected
input source.
– :
Do not assign a video input connector to the
selected input source.
o
Set Defaults
The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
191
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Source Rename
Change the display name for input source.
This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source
name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your
needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this
unit’s display and on the menu screen.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game /
AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CD /
TV Audio / Phono:
Change the display name for input
source.
Set Defaults:
The Source Rename settings are
returned to the default settings.
Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 163).
Hide Sources
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Show
(Default):
Use this source.
Hide: Do not use this source.
Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s
audio input.
Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels
between the different sources.
o
Source Level
n
When the input source is set to “iPod/USB”,
“Online Music” or “Tuner”
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o
Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs
n
When the input source is set other than to “iPod/
USB”, “Online Music” or “Tuner”
-12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
0
The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“ANALOG” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v
p. 190)
0
The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 190)
0
“Source Level” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
192
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Input Select
Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input
source.
“Input Select” settings are stored for each input source.
o
Input Mode
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.
Auto
(Default):
Automatically detect input signal and
perform playback.
HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital: Play only signals from digital audio input.
Analog: Play only signals from analog audio input.
0
When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.
If the ~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” and the connections.
(v p. 190)
0
If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV Audio” is fixed to ARC.
o
Decode Mode
Set the audio decode mode for input source.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”. But
we recommend changing it to “PCM” or “DTS” if the start of the source
is clipped or noise occurs.
Auto
(Default):
Detect type of digital audio input signal
and decode and play automatically.
PCM: Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS: Decode and play only DTS input signals.
This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL” is assigned
at “Input Assign” (v p. 190).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
193
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called
“Audyssey
®
Setup”.
You do not have to perform Audyssey
®
Setup when you have already performed “Speaker Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.
To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” on the menu. (v p. 220)
Audyssey
®
Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we
recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the
illustration (up to eight positions).
When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound
calibration microphone within 60 cm of the first measurement position
(main listening position).
If you perform the Audyssey
®
setup, the Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
, Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
and Audyssey LFC™ functions are
enabled. (v
p. 171 - 173)
.
FL SW C FR
SRSL
Surround speaker (R)
Surround speaker (L)
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Front speaker (R)
Front speaker (L)
( :Measuring positions)
Listening position
FL
FR
C
SW
SL
SR
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
194
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
About the main listening position
The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey
®
Setup, place the Sound
calibration microphone in the main listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32 uses the measurements from this position to
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover
value for the subwoofer.
o
About Audyssey Sub EQ HT™
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers
seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences
between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32 to both subwoofers together.
To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select “Measure (2 spkrs)” in
“Channel Select”. (v p. 197).
NOTE
0
Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices
(radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be
affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0
During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.
Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0
Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the
Sound calibration microphone at least 50 cm away from the wall. Failure to do so
will result in inaccurate readings.
0
During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers
and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise
in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0
Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the
main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0
Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the
headphones before performing Audyssey
®
Setup.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
195
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Procedure for speaker settings
(Audyssey
®
Setup)
.
Finish
Check
Calculation & Store
Measurement
Preparation
1
Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the
supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it
at the main listening position.
When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of
the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the
height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
2
If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
n
When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.
n
When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
0
Volume : 12 o’clock position
0
Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
0
Low pass filter : Off
0
Standby mode : Off
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
196
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
3
Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
.
When the Sound calibration microphone is
connected, the following screen is displayed.
.
Audyssey Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.
4
Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
Audyssey
®
Setup can also make the following settings.
0
Amp Assign
The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT1 speaker terminals can be switched in
accordance with your speaker environment. (Amp
Assign (v p. 205))
0
Channel Select
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance,
measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring
time can be reduced. You can also change the number of
surround back speakers and subwoofer.
5
Follow the instructions on the screen display and press
“Next” to proceed further.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
197
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
6
When the following screen is displayed, select “Begin
Test” and then press ENTER.
Start the measurement of the first position.
.
Begin Test
Back
Select “Begin Test” to start the calibration.
NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping
during the tests.
Ear Height
Audyssey Setup
0
Measurement requires several minutes.
NOTE
If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
0
Go to “Error messages” (v p. 202). Check any related items, and
perform the necessary procedures.
0
If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is
displayed. See “Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust”
(v p. 203).
7
When the detected speaker is displayed, select “Next”
and then press ENTER.
.
Audyssey Setup
Repeat Last Test Next
Speaker Detection
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
Surr. Back
Front Wide
Front Height
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:No
:No
:No
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
198
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
8
Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2,
select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position starts.
Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
.
Complete
Continue
Place the microphone ear level at the 2nd listening position,
which should be no more than 60cm away from the 1st
position, then select “Continue”...
Back
Ear Height
Audyssey Setup
To skip measuring the second and subsequent listening position, press o to
select “Complete” and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.
n
Stopping Audyssey
®
Setup
A
Press BACK to display the popup screen.
B
Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
9
Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.
10
Select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
.
Audyssey Setup
Continue
Repeat Last Test
Measurements complete.
Select Continue to analyze the data...
Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
0
Analysis takes several minutes to complete.
The more speakers and measurement positions that there are,
the more time it takes to perform the analysis.
NOTE
When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not
turned off.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
199
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
11
Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
.
The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the
settings as preferred.
.
Audyssey Setup
Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround
sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies
and television.
Turn on the Dynamic EQ?
Yes
No
Analyzing room data
50%
0
Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of
the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so
that sound can be heard even at low volume.
This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned
down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of
the night.
0
Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level
while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.
12
When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound
calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the
main unit and then press “Next”.
.
Audyssey Setup
Now Analyzing and correcting the your room data.
Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver.
Next
Back
Applying room corrections
100%
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
200
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
13
Select “Details” and press ENTER to verify the
measurement results.
0
Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the
actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
NOTE
Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey
®
Setup.
If these are changed, run Audyssey
®
Setup again in order to configure the optimum
equalizer settings.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
201
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey
®
Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error
message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
No speakers found.
0
Sound calibration microphone is not
detected.
0
Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
0
Not all speakers could be detected.
0
Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too
low
0
There is too much noise in the room.
0
Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
0
Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
0
Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.
0
Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the
speakers are facing.
0
Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Front R : None
0
The displayed speaker could not be
detected.
0
Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : Phase
0
The displayed speaker is connected with the
polarity reversed.
0
Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0
For some speakers, this error message may be displayed
even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the
connection is correct, press p to select “Ignore”, then press
ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
202
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Subwoofer level error message and how to
adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey
®
Setup
measurement is 75 dB.
During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed
when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 – 78 dB range.
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the
subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range.
G Error message H
.
Audyssey Setup
Back SW Level MatchingSkip
Your Subwoofer 1’s level is too high.
If your subwoofer has a volume control on it,
select “SW Level Matching” to interactively adjust the level of
your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select “Skip”.
1
Select “SW Level Matching” and then press ENTER.
2
Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3
When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range, select “Next” and then press ENTER.
0
If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer’s adjustment
will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
203
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Retrieving Audyssey
®
Setup settings
If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey
®
Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ
®
XT32) even
when you have changed each setting manually.
.
Audyssey Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
204
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings
made in Audyssey
®
Setup.
0
If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey
®
Setup,
you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
or Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
. (v p. 171 - 172)
0
This unit can be used without changing “Manual Setup” settings. Please
set if necessary.
Amp Assign
Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
o
Assign Mode
Select how to use the power amp.
You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker
configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign
Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.
11.1ch:
0
Setting to use the 9-channel power amplifier in this unit
and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT
to play back up to 11.1 channels.
0
You can connect speakers for up to 13.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for
playing back up to 11.1-channels in accordance with the
input signal and sound mode. (v
p. 208)
9.1ch
(Default):
0
Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to
MAIN ZONE to play back up to 9.1 channels.
0
You can connect speakers for up to 11.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for
playing back up to 9.1-channels in accordance with the
input signal and sound mode. (v
p. 211)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
205
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
7.1ch +
ZONE2:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE2 to 2-channels.
0
You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v
p. 213)
7.1ch +
ZONE3:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE3 to 2-channels
0
You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v
p. 214)
5.1ch +
ZONE2/3:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit
for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different
channel.
7.1ch +
ZONE2/3-
MONO:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.
0
You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v
p. 215)
7.1ch (Bi-
Amp):
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0
You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v
p. 216)
5.1ch (Bi-
Amp) +
ZONE2:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE2 to 2-channels.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
206
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
9.1ch/
2ch
Front:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
connecting 2-channel playback speakers to 2 channels.
0
You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel
playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using
multi-channel surround playback. (v p. 217)
When setting speakers for 2-channel playback, also
perform the “2ch Playback” setting. (v
p. 228)
7.1ch/
2ch
Front
(Bi-
Amp):
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for the
bi-amp connection of the 2-channel playback speakers
to 4 channels.
0
You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel
playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using
multi-channel surround playback.
When setting speakers for 2-channel playback, also
perform the “2ch Playback” setting. (v p. 228)
7.1ch +
Front B:
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit
for connecting the second set of front speakers.
0
You can switch between the desired combination of
front speakers A and front speakers B. (v p. 218)
Switch the front speaker using the “Front Speaker”
setting. (v p. 228)
Dolby
Atmos :
0
Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit
for the speaker layout suitable for Dolby Atmos
playback. (v p. 219)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
207
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“11.1ch”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch”, set the following items.
n
Height Speakers
Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
2 Height Speakers
(Default):
Uses a set of (two) height speakers.
4 Height Speakers : Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.
Using Dolby Speakers :
Uses a Dolby enabled speaker placed on
the floor.
n
Height Layout
Select the type of the height speakers used.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channel used.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height
Top Front & Top Rear
(Default)
Top Front Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
208
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Dolby
(Default)
Front Dolby Not assigned.
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Not assigned.
Back Dolby Back Dolby Not assigned.
Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Front Height & Back Dolby Front Height Back Dolby
Top Front & Surround Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby
Top Front & Back Dolby Top Front Back Dolby
Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Front Dolby & Back Dolby Front Dolby Back Dolby
n
Wide/Height2
Select the channel that is output from the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
Front Wide
(Default):
Outputs the front wide channel from the FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
Top Rear
z
:
Outputs the channel assigned for HEIGHT2 from the
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
For the front wide channel, use the PRE OUT
connectors.
z
The displayed selection shows the channel name assigned for HEIGHT2 in the
“Height Layout” setting.
In some settings, “Wide/Height2” may not be available.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
209
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
Pre-out
Selects the PRE OUT connectors that connect the external power
amplifier used in MAIN ZONE.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Front:
The front left and right pre-amp outputs are connected
to an external amplifier.
Front
Height
z
:
The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
z
The displayed selection shows the speaker name assigned for the HEIGHT1
speaker terminal in the “Height Layout” setting.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers” and “Wide/
Height2” is set to “Front Wide”H
Top Rear
z
:
The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Top Front & Top
Rear
z
:
The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Top
Rear
z
:
The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.
z
The speaker name selected using “Height Layout” is displayed.
When one set of pre-amp outputs are used, a maximum 11.1-channel audio can
be output when Dolby Atmos or Dolby Surround are played back. Furthermore,
when two sets of pre-amp outputs are used, a maximum 11.1-channel audio can
be output when Audyssey DSX
®
or Neo:X are played back in addition to when
Dolby Atmos or Dolby Surround are played back.
G
When “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers” and “Wide/
Height2” is set other than to “Front Wide”H
Front Wide:
The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Front
Wide:
The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
210
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Available settings differ depending on the “Height Layout” and “Wide/
Height2” settings.
Front:
The front left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front Dolby
z
:
The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Surround
Dolby
z
:
The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front Dolby &
Surr. Dolby
z
:
The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Surr.
Dolby
z
:
The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.
Front Wide:
The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Front
Wide:
The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.
z
The speaker name selected using “Height Layout” is displayed.
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“9.1ch”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch”, set the following items.
n
Height Speakers
Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
None: Uses no height speakers.
2 Height Speakers
(Default):
Uses a set of (two) height speakers.
4 Height Speakers: Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.
Using Dolby Speakers:
Uses a Dolby enabled speaker placed on
the floor.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
211
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
Height Layout
Select the type of the height speakers used.
This can be selected when the “Height Speakers” setting is “2 Height
Speakers”, “4 Height Speakers” or “Using Dolby Speakers”.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channel used.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pairs of speakers.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height
Top Front & Top Rear
(Default)
Top Front Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Dolby
(Default)
Front Dolby Not assigned.
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Not assigned.
Back Dolby Back Dolby Not assigned.
Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Top Front & Surround Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby
Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
212
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE2”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE2”, set the following
items.
n
Speakers for ZONE2
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE2.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE2 cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from HEIGHT1
speaker terminals.
SURROUND BACK:
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.
n
Height Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE2” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
213
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE3”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE3”, set the following
items.
n
Speakers for ZONE3
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE3.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE3 cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Outputs audio in ZONE3 from FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Outputs audio in ZONE3 from HEIGHT1
speaker terminals.
SURROUND BACK:
Outputs audio in ZONE3 from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.
n
Height Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE3” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
214
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”, set the
following items.
n
Speakers for ZONE2/3
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE2/ZONE3 cannot
be output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals and
audio in ZONE3 from the R channel.
HEIGHT1:
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and audio in ZONE3
from the R channel.
SURROUND
BACK:
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals and audio in
ZONE3 from the R channel.
n
Height Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE2/3” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
215
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch (Bi-Amp)”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch (Bi-Amp)”, set the following items.
n
Speakers for Bi-Amp
Select the speaker terminals used for the bi-amp connection of front
speakers.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for the bi-amp cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.
SURROUND
BACK:
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.
n
Height Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for Bi-Amp” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
216
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“9.1ch/2ch Front”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch/2ch Front”, set the following
items.
n
Speakers for 2ch
Select the speaker terminals that connect the front speakers
exclusively used for 2-channel playback.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2-
channel playback to the “FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2” speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2-
channel playback to the HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.
SURROUND
BACK:
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2-
channel playback to the SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.
n
Height Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for 2ch” setting is “FRONT
WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
217
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + Front B”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + Front B”, set the following
items.
n
Speakers for Front B
Select the speaker terminals used for the front speakers of the second
unit.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals.
SURROUND
BACK:
Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
n
Height Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for Front B” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items
HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default)
Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
218
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Detailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“Dolby Atmos”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “Dolby Atmos”, set the following items.
n
Layout
Select the speaker layout for Dolby Atmos playback.
7.1ch + 4 Height:
This is a layout that adds the top front and
top rear speakers to the 7.1 channel layout
which includes the surround back channel.
Connect the top front speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and connect the
top rear speakers to the HEIGHT2 PRE OUT
connectors through an external power
amplifier.
7.1ch + 2 Height
(Default):
This is a layout that adds the top middle
speakers to the 7.1 channel layout including
the surround back channel. Connect the top
middle speakers to the HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.
5.1ch + 4 Height:
This is a layout that adds the top front and
top rear speakers to the basic 5.1 channel
layout. Connect the top front speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and the top rear
speakers to the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
5.1ch + 2 Height:
This is a layout that adds the top middle
speakers to the basic 5.1 channel layout.
Connect the top middle speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals.
o
View Terminal Config.
This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT
connectors for your “Amp Assign” setting on the menu screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
219
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Speaker Config.
Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low
bass frequencies and speaker size.
o
Front
Set the front speaker size.
Large
(Default):
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
0
When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.
0
When “Front” is set to “Small”, you cannot set speakers other than “Front” to
“Large”.
o
Center
Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when a center speaker is not
connected.
o
Subwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
2 spkrs: Use two subwoofers.
1 spkr
(Default):
Use only one subwoofer.
None:
Select when a subwoofer is not
connected.
When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” and you set “Front” to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is
automatically set to “1 spkr”.
o
Surround
Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the surround speakers are
not connected.
When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr. Back”, “Front Wide”, “Surround Dolby”
and “Back Dolby” are automatically set to “None”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
220
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Surr. Back
Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the surround back speakers
are not connected.
2 spkrs
(Default):
Use two surround back speakers.
1 spkr:
Use only one surround back speaker.
Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND
BACK when this setting is selected.
If “Surr. Back” is “None” or “1 spkr”, “Back Dolby” is automatically “None”.
o
Front Wide
Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the front wide speakers are
not connected.
o
Front Height
Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the front height speakers are
not connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
221
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Top Front
Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the top front speakers are
not connected.
o
Top Middle
Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the top middle speakers are
not connected.
o
Top Rear
Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the top rear speakers are
not connected.
o
Rear Height
Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the rear height speakers are
not connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
222
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Front Dolby
Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the front Dolby speakers are
not connected.
o
Surround Dolby
Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the surround Dolby
speakers are not connected.
o
Back Dolby
Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.
Large:
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None:
Select when the back Dolby speakers are
not connected.
When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in “Amp Assign” are set to
“None”, “None” is automatically set for Height2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
223
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each
speaker.
o
Unit
Set the unit of distance.
Meters (Default)
Feet
o
Step
Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
0.1 m (Default) / 0.01 m
1 ft / 0.1 ft
o
Set Defaults
The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.
o
Set the distance
0.00 m – 18.00 m / 0.0 ft – 60.0 ft
0
The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” and
“Speaker Config.” settings. (v p. 205, 220)
0
Default settings:
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / Center /
Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 3.60 m (12.0 ft)
Speakers other than the above: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
0
Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m
(20.0 ft).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
224
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position
when it is output from each speaker.
o
Test Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker.
While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the
selected speaker.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
0
The set “Levels” are reflected in all sound modes.
0
If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in “Channel Level Adjust”. (v
p. 123)
0
When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set “Levels”.
o
Set Defaults
The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
225
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Crossovers
Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies
that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual
for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
o
Speaker Selection
Selects how to set the crossover frequency.
All
(Default):
Sets the same crossover frequency for all
speakers.
Individual:
Selects the crossover points for each
speaker individually.
o
Set the crossover frequency
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)
0
“Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” setting is “LFE+Main”, or
when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. (v p. 227)
0
The default crossover frequency is “80 Hz”, which will work best with the
widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that
the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to
“250 Hz” when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
0
Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the
speakers set in “Small”. This cut off bass frequency is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
0
The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ depending on
to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting. (v
p. 227)
0
When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be
set. If the speakers are set to (v p. 220)“Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
0
When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the
“Speaker Config.” setting. (v p. 220)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
226
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Bass
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
o
Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):
The low range signal of the channel set to
“Small” speaker size is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:
The low range signal of all channels is
added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
0
“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the
menu is set to other than “None”. (v p. 220)
0
Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0
If “Speaker Config.” - “Front” and “Center” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer
Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers,
depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. Select “LFE+Main” if
you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
(v
p. 220)
o
LPF for LFE
Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the
playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz
(Default : 120 Hz)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
227
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Front Speaker
Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.
A
(Default):
Front speaker A is used.
B : Front speaker B is used.
A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + Front B”. (v p. 205)
2ch Playback
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
o
Setting
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
Auto
(Default):
The settings in “Speakers” are applied. (v p. 194)
Manual:
Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the
following settings:
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
228
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Front
Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.
Large
(Default):
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back
very low bass frequencies.
Small:
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies.
When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, “Large” is
automatically set. (v p. 220)
o
Subwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
Yes
(Default):
Use a subwoofer.
No: Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, No is
automatically set. (v p. 220) If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the setting is
automatically “Yes”.
o
SW Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):
When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large”, only
LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also,
when “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Small”, the
front channel low range signals are added to the
LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:
The front channel low range signal is added to the
LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
229
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Crossover
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each
channel to the subwoofer.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)
0
This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
0
When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large” and “SW Mode” is set to LFE,
“Full Band” is displayed and this cannot be set.
o
Distance FL/Distance FR
Set distance from main listening position to speaker.
0.00 m – 18.00 m (Default : 3.60 m) /
0.0 ft – 60.0 ft (Default : 12.0 ft)
Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m (20.0
ft).
o
Level FL/Level FR
Adjust the level of each channel.
-12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
230
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On”. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the “IP Address” settings, and enter
information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.
Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address /
MAC Address
MAC Address is required to create a vTuner account.
Connection
Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a
wired LAN.
When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select “Wired
(Ethernet)” after connecting a LAN cable,
When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select “Wireless (Wi-
Fi)” and configure the “Wi-Fi Setup”.
o
Connect Using
Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).
Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.
Wireless (Wi-Fi):
Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect
to a network.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
231
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Wi-Fi Setup
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.
The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection
method to suit your home environment.
o
Scan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible
networks shown on the TV screen.
1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks.
Select “Rescan” if the network cannot be found.
2. Enter your password and select “OK”.
o
Use iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By
connecting your iOS device to this unit, the unit can be automatically
connected to the same network as your device.
This unit can be connected to your iOS device in two ways, using a
USB cable and using Wi-Fi.
n
When connecting using Wi-Fi
1. Select “Wireless connection” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) router and select “Denon AVR-X5200W” from “SET UP
NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER...” at the bottom of the Wi-Fi
configuration screen of your iOS device.
3. Tap “Next” on the screen of the iOS device.
The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS7 or later.
n
When using a USB cable
1. Select “USB cable” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) and connect it to the USB port on the front panel using a
USB cable.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen.
4. Tap “Allow” when the connection message appears on the
screen of your iOS device.
The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS5 or later.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
232
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
WPS Router
Use a WPS-compatible router to connect.
There are two ways to connect, using the push button method or the
PIN code method. Select the connection method to match your router.
n
When connecting using the push button method
1. Select “Push Button” on the TV screen.
2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the
router you wish to connect to.
0
The time for pressing the button varies depending on the
router.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen within 2 minutes.
n
When connecting using the PIN code method
1. Select “PIN” on the TV screen.
2. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of
wireless networks.
This displays the PIN code of the unit on the TV screen.
3. Register the PIN code of the unit in the router.
o
Manual
Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to
connect to.
1. Set the following items.
SSID: Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Security:
Select the encryption method according to the
encryption setting of the access point you are using.
Password: Input the password.
Default Key:
Select the Default Key.
When connecting to a “WEP” encrypted network,
“Default Key” menu is displayed.
2. Select “Connect” at the end of the setting.
The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or
tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
When using a device that has a firmware version of iOS7 or later, “When connecting
using Wi-Fi” (v p. 232) in “Use iOS Device”.
1. Press and hold the DIMMER and STATUS buttons on the main unit for at least 3
seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to “Denon AVR-X5200W” when
the message “Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called “Denon AVR-
X5200W”” appears in the display.
3. Start up the browser and enter “192.168.1.16” in the URL.
4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select “Connect” and then exit the settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
233
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Settings
Configure the proxy settings and IP address.
0
If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be
automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to “On” in the
default settings of this unit.
0
Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server
information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting
to a network without DHCP function.
0
Configure the proxy settings when using a proxy server to connect to
the Internet.
.
DHCP
-IP Address
-Subnet Mask
Proxy
Save
Cancel
-Address
-Port
-Default Gateway
-Primary DNS
-Secondary DNS
Configures the network settings manually
Off
000.000.000.000
On(Address)
000.000.000.000
00000
Network/Settings
192.168.001.002
255.255.255.000
192.168.001.001
192.168.001.001
o
DHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
On
(Default):
Configure the network settings
automatically from your router.
Off: Configure the network settings manually.
o
IP Address
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
0
The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A:10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254
CLASS B:172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254
CLASS C:192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254
o
Subnet Mask
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to
this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.
o
Default Gateway
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
o
Primary DNS, Secondary DNS
If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more
DNS are provided by your provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and
“Secondary DNS”.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
234
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Proxy
Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a
proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your
provider, etc.
On(Address): Select when inputting by address.
On(Name): Select when inputting by domain name.
Off
(Default):
Disables the proxy server.
o
Port
Enter port number.
0
If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings.
(v
p. 69)
0
If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
IP Control
Enables network communication in standby power mode.
Off In Standby
(Default):
Suspend network function during standby.
Always On:
Network is on during standby. Main unit
operable with a network compatible
controller.
When using the web control function or Denon Remote App, use with the “IP Control”
setting set to “Always On”.
NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, it consumes more standby power.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
235
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You
can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
o
Friendly Name
Selects Friendly Name from the list.
When you select “Other”, you can change the Friendly Name
according to your preferences.
Home Theater / Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room /
Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den /
Office / Other
0
Up to 63 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v
p. 163).
0
The default Friendly Name on first use is “Denon AVR-X5200W”.
o
Set Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.
Diagnostics
Used to check the network connection.
o
Physical Connection
Checks the physical LAN port connection.
OK
Error: The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.
When connected using a wireless LAN, “Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)” will be
displayed.
o
Router Access
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.
OK
Error:
Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router
settings.
o
Internet Access
Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
OK
Error:
Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection
environment or router settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
236
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a Denon service engineer or
custom installer. Ordinarily, this mode isn’t suitable for use by the end
user, only by a trained service technician or custom installation
professional.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a Denon serviceperson or installer.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
237
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
General
Make various other settings.
Language
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
English / Deutsch / Français / Italiano / Español / Nederlands /
Svenska / Pусский / Polski
(Default : English)
“Language” can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen
is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.
1.
Press and hold the main unit’s o and p at the same time for at least 3
seconds.
“zVideo Format <PAL>” appears on the display.
2.
Press the main unit’s i.
“zGUI Language <ENGLISH>” appears on the display.
3.
Use the main unit’s o or p and set the language.
4.
Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
ECO
Configure the settings of the ECO Mode and auto standby mode.
o
ECO Mode
This mode can reduce the power consumption when the power of the
unit is on.
On: Reduce the power consumption.
Auto:
The power consumption is automatically
reduced to match the volume.
Off
(Default):
Do not reduce the power consumption.
0
When you want to output audio at a high volume level, it is recommended to
set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
0
Eco mode can also be switched by pressing ECO G on the remote control
unit.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
238
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Power On Default
Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.
Last
(Default):
The ECO Mode will be set to the previous
setting before the power was switched off.
On:
When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“On”.
Auto:
When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Auto”.
Off:
When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Off”.
o
On Screen Display
Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV
screen.
Always On:
Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Auto
(Default):
Display the meter when changing the mode
or volume.
Off: Do not display the meter.
o
Auto Standby
Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.
n
MAIN ZONE
Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or
video signals input into this unit.
Before the unit enters standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on
the unit display and the menu screen.
60 min:
The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
30 min:
The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
15 min
(Default):
The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.
Off:
The unit does not go into standby
automatically.
n
ZONE2 / ZONE3
When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here,
the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.
8 hours:
Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state
after about 8 hours.
4 hours:
Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 4 hours.
2 hours:
Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 2 hours.
Off
(Default):
Does not automatically switch ZONE2/
ZONE3 to the standby state.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
239
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Values set for “Volume Limit” and “Power On Volume” are displayed according to the
setting specified for the volume “Scale”. (v p. 170)
o
Bass
Adjust bass.
-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o
Treble
Adjust treble.
-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o
High Pass Filter
Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
On:
The low range is attenuated.
Off
(Default):
The low range is not attenuated.
o
Lch Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o
Rch Level
Adjust the right channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o
Channel
Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.
Stereo
(Default):
Stereo playback.
Mono: Monaural playback.
o
HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)
Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.
Through
(Default):
The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the
device in ZONE2.
PCM:
The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a
PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT
terminals or speaker terminals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
240
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable
(Default):
Volume can be adjusted.
1 – 98
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The
volume cannot be adjusting using the remote
control unit.
o
Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
(Default : 70 (-10 dB))
Off: Do not set a maximum volume.
This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 241)
o
Power On Volume
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last
(Default):
Use the memorized setting from the last
session.
Mute: Always use the muting on condition.
1 – 98
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):
The volume is adjusted to the set level.
This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 241)
o
Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
(Default):
The sound is muted entirely.
–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
241
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.
Up to 10 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 163).
Quick Select Names
Change the quick select name that appears on the TV screen to one you
prefer.
Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4
Set Defaults:
The default setting is restored for the edited quick select
name.
Up to 16 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 163).
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out.
For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jacks, see
“TRIGGER OUT jacks” (v p. 72).
n
When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 /
ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to
“On”.
n
When setting for input source
Activates trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.
n
When setting for HDMI monitor
Activates trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.
On:
Activate trigger on this mode.
– – –: Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
242
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Front Display
Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
o
Dimmer
Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
Bright
(Default):
Normal display brightness.
Dim: Reduced display brightness.
Dark: Very low display brightness.
Off: Turns the display off.
You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.
o
Channel Indicators
Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for
the channel indication on the display.
Input:
Uses the input signal display for the channel
indication on the display.
Output
(Default):
Uses the output signal display for the channel
indication on the display.
Information
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
o
Audio
Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.
Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.
Input Signal: The input signal type.
Format:
The number of input signal channels (presence of
front, surround, LFE).
Sample Rate: The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Offset: The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag:
This is displayed when inputting signals including a
surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with
DTS-ES Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-
ES Discrete signals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
243
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Video
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for
MAIN ZONE.
HDMI Signal Info.
Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2
Interface / Resolutions
o
ZONE
Show information about current settings.
MAIN ZONE:
This item shows information about settings for
MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs
according to the input source.
ZONE2:
This item shows information about settings for
ZONE2.
ZONE3:
This item shows information about settings for
ZONE3.
o
Firmware
Version: Displays information for the current firmware.
o
Notifications
Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is
turned on.
Notification Alerts
On
(Default):
Notification messages are displayed.
Off: Notification messages are not displayed.
Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume,
sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.
.
AUDYSSEY
SIGNAL
EXT FHRFHL
SB SBRSBL
C FR FWRFLFWL
LFE SRSL
SBRSBL
C FRFL
SW1 SRSL
INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS
SOUND
SOURCE
Dynamic EQ : On
MultEQ XT32 : Reference
Dynamic Volume : Medium
Dolby TrueHD
50.0
Dolby TrueHD
Blu-ray
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
244
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Usage Data
To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects
anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as
frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).
Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.
Yes: Provide information on the operating status of this unit.
No: Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
245
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Firmware
Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades,
updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for
updates and upgrades.
o
Update
Updates the firmware of this unit.
Check for
Update:
Checks to see if the firmware is the latest version. You
can also check approximately how long it will take to
complete an update.
Update
Start:
Execute the update process. When the update starts,
the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the
progress is shown on the display.
This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If the update still fails,
either one of the following messages will appear on the screen. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update
again.
Display Description
Updating fail Updating failed.
Login failed Failure to log into server.
Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.
Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.
o
Notifications
When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is
displayed on the TV screen at power on.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the
power is turned on.
Update
On
(Default):
Display update message.
Off: Do not display update message.
Upgrade
On
(Default):
Display upgrade message.
Off: Do not display upgrade message.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
246
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Add New Feature
Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform
an upgrade.
Upgrade
Package:
Display the items to be upgraded.
Upgrade
Status:
Display a list of the additional functions provided by
the upgrade.
Upgrade Start:
Execute the upgrade process.
When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut
down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade
time which has elapsed is displayed.
0
See the Denon website for details about upgrades.
0
When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and
upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not
Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s
u and INFO for at least 3 seconds.
0
If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware” - “Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment and then perform the upgrade again.
Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”
0
In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system
requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v
p. 69)
0
Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
0
Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure
to be completed.
0
Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot
be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore,
there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,
etc., set on this unit.
0
If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for
more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update
Retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at
which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the
network environment.
Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be
announced on the Denon website each time related plans are defined.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
247
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
o
Lock
On: Turn protection on.
Off
(Default):
Turn protection off.
When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.
NOTE
When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup
Lock”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
248
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operating external devices with the remote control unit
.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
MENU
MENU
Z2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
ENTER
ENTER
+10
+10
GHI
GHI
JKL
JKL
MNO
MNO
PQRS
PQRS
TUV
TUV
ABC
ABC
DEF
DEF
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WXYZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
DEVICE
DEVICE TV
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
TUNER
TUNER
OPTION
OPTION
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
SETUP
SETUP
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
ENTER
ENTER
DE
V.
V. T V AVR
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
CD
CD
CH/
PAG E
PAGE
OPTION
TV AUDIO
MAIN
SETUP
CBL/SAT
Z2
Z3
DVD
Blu-ray
AUX1
GAME
AUX2
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
Operation mode
indicators
0 - 9
QUICK
SELECT
1 – 4
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it
can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players
or TVs made by different manufacturers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
249
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Registering preset codes
There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for
registering preset codes of Denon players, and the method for registering
the preset numbers of other manufacturers’ devices.
●
“Registering Denon Players”(v
p. 250）
●
“Registering by entering preset numbers”(v p. 251）
o
Registering Denon Players
Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of Denon
Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.
n
Registering Blu-ray Disc Players
1
Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until the
DEV, TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
n
Registering DVD Players
1
Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until the DEV,
TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
n
Registering CD Players
1
Press and hold down CD and OPTION until the DEV, TV
and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green,
then release.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
250
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
Registering multiple players at the same time
1
Press and hold down QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 and OPTION
until the DEV, TV and AVR indicators on the remote are
flashing green, then release.
Devices to be registered at the
same time
Press and hold down
the buttons
Blu-ray Disc
player
DVD player CD player
P P
QUICK SELECT 1 and
OPTION
P P
QUICK SELECT 2 and
OPTION
P P
QUICK SELECT 3 and
OPTION
P P P
QUICK SELECT 4 and
OPTION
NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate. In this case, try “Registering by entering preset numbers” (v p. 251).
o
Registering by entering preset numbers
Before starting, confirm the preset number of the device that you want
to register and the buttons that can be registered in the “Preset Code
Table” (v p. 317) in the Appendix.
1
Press and hold down the input source button that you
want to register the preset code to and SETUP until the
DEV, TV and AVR indicators are flashing green.
2
Enter the preset number (5 digits) listed for the device
in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 –
9) on the remote control.
Some manufacturers use more than one type of preset code. Preset codes to change
the number and verify correct operation.
NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
251
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Operating devices
To operate an external device, press the input source button registered
with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.
0
The “DEV.” indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
0
The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
0
To operate the menu of this unit, press MAIN before operating the unit. The “AVR”
indicator lights when this unit is being operated.
n
CBL/SAT group
(Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/
Media player/IP TV) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE X
Power on/off
DEVICE MENU Menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
u i o p
Cursor operation
ENTER(Cursor) Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Home menu
8 9
Skip chapter
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
ENTER(Number) 3 digit entry
Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs
the power-on operation.
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
GHI
GH I
JKL
JK L
MNO
MN O
PQRS
PQ RS
TUV
TU V
ABC
AB C
DEF
DE F
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WX YZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
TV AVR
TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
DE
V.
V.
MENU
MENU
DEVICE
DEVICE
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
252
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
TV group
(TV) operation
Operation buttons Function
TV X
TV power on/off
TV INPUT Switch TV input
TV MENU TV menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
u i o p
Cursor operation
ENTER(Cursor) Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
8 9
Skip chapter
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
ENTER(Number) 3 digit entry
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
GHI
GH I
JKL
JK L
MNO
MN O
PQRS
PQ RS
TUV
TU V
ABC
AB C
DEF
DE F
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WX YZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
TV AVR
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
DE
V.
V.
MENU
MENU
DEVICE
DEVICE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
TV
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
n
VCR/PVR group
(Video cassette recorder (VCR)/personal video
recorder (PVR)) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE X
Power on/off
DEVICE MENU Menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
u i o p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
8 9
Skip chapter
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
GHI
GH I
JKL
JK L
MNO
MN O
PQRS
PQ RS
TUV
TU V
ABC
AB C
DEF
DE F
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WX YZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
TV AVR
TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
DE
V.
V.
MENU
MENU
DEVICE
DEVICE
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
0
+10
+10
0
Depending on the device, the power may not be turned off for the DEVICE X and TV X buttons.
0
TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without pressing the TV button.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
253
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
n
BD/DVD group
(Blu-ray Disc player/HD-DVD player/DVD
player/DVD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE X
Power on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
CH/PAGE df
Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
u i o p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup, Home menu
8 9
Skip chapter
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10
Select title, chapter or channel
selection
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
GHI
GH I
JKL
JK L
MNO
MN O
PQRS
PQ RS
TUV
TU V
ABC
AB C
DEF
DE F
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WX YZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
TV AVR
TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
DE
V.
V.
MENU
MENU
DEVICE
DEVICE
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
ENTER
ENTER
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
n
Audio group
(CD player/CD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE X
Power on/off
INFO Information
u i o p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
8 9
Skip track
1
Playback
6 7
Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3
Pause
2
Stop
0 – 9, +10 Track selection
SOUND MODE
SOUND MODE
POWER
POWER
AVR CONTROL
AVR CONTROL
QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
TUNE
PURE
PURE
MOVIE
MOVIE
GAME
GAME
MUSIC
MUSIC
GAME
GAME
CB
CBL/
SAT
Blu-ray
Blu-ray
D
VD
VD
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
INTERNET
R
ADIO
ADIO
iPo
iPod/
USB
USB
VOLUME
VOLUME
Z 2
Z 3
Z 3
1 2 3 4
GHI
GH I
JKL
JK L
MNO
MN O
PQRS
PQ RS
TUV
TU V
ABC
AB C
DEF
DE F
SLE
EP
EP
WXYZ
WX YZ
MAIN
MAIN
PHONO
PHONO
TV AVR
TV
MED
IA
IA
PLAY
ER
ER
ONLINE
ONLINE
MUSIC
MUSIC
CD
CD
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
TUNER
TUNER
TV
AUDIO
AUDIO
MENU
MENU
INP
INPUT
MUTE
MUTE
ECO
ECO
DE
V.
V.
MENU
MENU
DEVICE
DEVICE
OPTION
OPTION
INFO
INFO
ENTER
ENTER
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
ENTER
ENTER0
+10
+10
CH/
PAGE
PAGE
BACK
BACK
SETUP
SETUP
Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation. (Depending on the device, some Denon models can only be operated with the power
turned on.)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
254
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Initializing registered preset codes
1
Press and hold down MAIN and OPTION until the DEV,
TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing
green, then release.
Specifying the operating zone with the
remote control
To prevent accidental misuse, you can set the zone for which the remote
control unit is used.
1
Press and hold down either MAIN, Z2 or Z3 and SETUP
at the same time until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators
flash green.
MAIN: When only using MAIN ZONE
Z2: When using MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
Z3
(Default):
When using MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and
ZONE3
Resetting the remote control unit
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
1
Press and hold down DEVICE MENU until the DEV, TV
and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green,
then release.
2
Press 9, 8 and 1, in that order.
The DEV., TV and AVR indicators flash twice.
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
255
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Contents
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 257
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 257
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 257
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 257
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume
level 257
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content
such as TV and movies 257
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the
configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one 258
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 258
I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening
to the Internet radio 258
I want to delete unused input sources 258
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 258
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game
on my game console 258
Troubleshooting
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 260
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 261
Display on this unit shows nothing 261
No sound comes out 262
Desired sound does not come out 263
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 265
No video is shown on the TV 266
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 268
iPod cannot be played back 269
USB memory devices cannot be played back 270
File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed
properly 271
Bluetooth cannot be played back 271
The Internet radio cannot be played back 272
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 273
Various online services cannot be played 273
The HDMI control function does not work 274
When it is not possible to connect to a wireless LAN network 275
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 276
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Tips
256
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake
0
Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. (v p. 170, 241)
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on
0
By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for “Power On Volume” in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (v p. 170, 241)
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio
0
Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you
can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 227)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer
0
Select a setting that makes the dialog easier to hear in the option menu “Dialog Enhancer”. (v
p. 122)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level
0
Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost
even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 172)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies
0
Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level. (v p. 173)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
257
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one.
0
Perform Audyssey
®
Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 194)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music
0
Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while
listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, Internet radio or Bluetooth. (v p. 125)
I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening to the Internet radio
0
After playing back photos from Flickr, start the slide show on the Internet radio playback screen. (v p. 121)
I want to delete unused input sources
0
Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the SOURCE SELECT knob on
this unit. (v p. 192)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
0
Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “Start”. You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in
MAIN ZONE. (v p. 127)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game on my game console
0
When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set “Video Mode” in the menu to “Game”. (v
p. 183)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
258
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.
If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power
immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
259
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Power does not turn on.
0
Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. 73
Power automatically turns
off.
0
The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. 144
0
“Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To
disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on the menu to “Off”.
239
Power turns off and the
power indicator flashes in
red approx. every 2
seconds.
0
The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off,
wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again.
305
0
Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation. －
Power turns off and the
power indicator flashes in
red approx. every 0.5
seconds.
0
Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable
core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and
came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action
such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire.
35
0
Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. 75
0
This unit’s amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center. －
The power to this unit does
not turn off when you press
the Power operation
button. “ZONE2 On” or
“ZONE3 On” appears on
the display.
0
Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on the main unit, or press the POWER X button after
pressing the Z2 or Z3 button on the remote control to turn off the power of ZONE2 or ZONE3.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
260
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Operations cannot be
performed through the
remote control unit.
0
Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. 9
0
Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°. 9
0
Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. －
0
Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks.
9
0
The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb
light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
－
0
The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit.
Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the zone to operate.
161
0
The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press MAIN to set the operating
mode to AVR.
252
0
When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of
infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the
direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect
operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
－
o
Display on this unit shows nothing
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Display is off.
0
Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”. 243
0
When the sound mode is set to “Pure Direct”, the display is off. 130
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
261
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
No sound comes out
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
No sound comes out of
speakers.
0
Check the connections for all devices. 35
0
Insert connection cables all the way in. －
0
Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. －
0
Check cables for damage. －
0
Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the
metal part on speaker terminals.
35
0
Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. 35
0
Check that a proper input source is selected. 75
0
Adjust the volume. 76
0
Cancel the mute mode. 76
0
Check the digital audio input connector setting. 190
0
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output
is set to off by default.
－
0
When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the
speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.
18
No sound comes out when
using the DVI-D
connection.
0
When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a
separate audio connection.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
262
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Desired sound does not come out
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The volume does not
increase.
0
The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit” on the menu. 170
0
Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings,
so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
－
No sound comes out with
the HDMI connection.
0
Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. 56
0
When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to “AVR”. To output
from the TV, set “TV”.
180
0
When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. 143
No sound comes out of a
specific speaker.
0
Check that speaker cables are properly connected. 35
0
Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu. 220
0
Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu. 205
0
When the sound mode is “Stereo” and “Virtual”, audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.
－
No sound is produced from
subwoofer.
0
Check the subwoofer connections. 36
0
Turn on the subwoofer’s power. －
0
Set “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu to “1 spkr” or “2 spkrs”. 220
0
When “Speaker Config.” - “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input signal and the
sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.
220
0
When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the
subwoofer.
227
0
You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the “Subwoofer Mode” to “LFE+Main”. 227
DTS sound is not output.
0
Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”. －
0
Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”. 193
Dolby Atmos, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby
Digital Plus audio is not
output.
0
Make HDMI connections. 60
0
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is set by
default.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
263
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
DTS Neo:X mode cannot
be selected.
0
It cannot be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surround” is set for “None”. 220
0
DTS Neo:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
Dolby Surround mode
cannot be selected.
0
Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
,
Audyssey Dynamic
Volume
®
and Audyssey
LFC™ cannot be selected.
0
These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey
®
Setup.
194
0
Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 130
0
These cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
Audyssey DSX
®
cannot be
selected.
0
It can be selected when using the front height or front wide speakers. 221
0
It can be selected when using the center speaker. 220
0
Switch the sound mode to Dolby sound mode or DTS sound mode. 129
0
This cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
0
This cannot be set when the input signal is a 2-channel source. －
“Restorer” cannot be
selected.
0
Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of
multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, “Restorer” cannot be used.
169
0
Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 130
No audio is output from
PRE OUT or speakers for
ZONE2/ZONE3.
0
In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/
COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.
－
0
In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM
format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format, set “HDMI Audio” in the
menu to “PCM”. Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this
setting. In that case, set the audio format to “PCM (2ch)” on the played back device.
240
0
When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the
Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 10 m.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
264
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
During playback from the
Internet radio or USB
memory device, sound is
occasionally interrupted.
0
When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. －
0
The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy. －
When making a call on
iPhone, noise occurs in
audio output on this unit.
0
When making a call, keep a distance of 20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit. －
Noise often occurs in
FM/AM broadcasting.
0
Change the antenna orientation or position. 67
0
Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit. －
0
Use an FM outdoor antenna. 67
0
Separate the antenna from other connection cables. 67
The sounds appear to be
distorted.
0
Lower the volume. 76
0
Set “Off” to the ECO Mode. When “On” or “Auto” is in the ECO Mode, the audio may by distorted when
the playback volume is high.
238
Sound cuts out when using
Wi-Fi connection.
0
If nearby devices cause playback to cut out due to electronic interference, switch to a wired LAN
connection.
69
0
Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the
playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection.
232
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
265
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
No video is shown on the TV
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
No picture appears.
0
Check the connections for all devices. 56
0
Insert connection cables all the way in. －
0
Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. －
0
Check cables for damage. －
0
Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. 190
0
Check that the proper input source is selected. 75
0
Check the video input connector setting. 190
0
Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. 244
0
Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not
compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.
280
0
The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. 281
0
Use an “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High speed cable” that comes with the HDMI logo if
you wish to playback 4K (60/50 Hz) video.
－
No video is shown on the
TV with the DVI-D
connection.
0
With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the
copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).
280
No video from an input
source such as a game
console is shown on the
TV.
0
When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the video conversion function may not
function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.
－
While the menu is being
displayed, no video is
shown on the TV.
0
The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during
playback of the following video signals.
- Some images of 3D video contents
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- 4K video
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
266
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
When using HDMI ZONE2,
the video output in MAIN
ZONE is interrupted.
0
When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in
MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
267
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The menu screen or status
information screen is not
displayed on the TV.
0
The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is
connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this
unit.
－
0
The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.
- Some images of 3D video content
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
129
0
When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is
not displayed properly.
129
0
In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a
sound mode other than the pure direct mode.
129
0
Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. 189
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
268
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
iPod cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
iPod cannot be connected.
0
When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported. 65
0
When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be
recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.
－
The AirPlay icon ' is not
displayed on iTunes /
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
0
This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to
the same LAN as this unit.
69
0
The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to
the latest version.
－
Audio is not output.
0
The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes /
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
－
0
The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon ' on the
iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.
114
Audio is interrupted during
the AirPlay playback on
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
0
Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using
AirPlay.
－
0
Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by
taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.
－
iTunes cannot be played
back through the remote
control unit.
0
Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform
playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
269
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
USB memory devices cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
“No connection” is
displayed.
0
This unit cannot recognize the USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. 65
0
Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. －
0
This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to
the USB port.
－
0
The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32. －
0
Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized.
When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power
from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
－
Files on the USB memory
device are not displayed.
0
Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 82
0
This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can
also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.
－
0
When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed. －
Files on a USB memory
device cannot be played.
0
Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. 283
0
You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be
played on this unit.
－
0
Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB. －
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
270
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The file names are not
displayed properly (“...”,
etc.).
0
Characters that cannot be displayed have been used. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed
are replaced with a “. (period)”.
－
o
Bluetooth cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Bluetooth devices cannot
be connected to this unit.
0
The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner’s Manual of the
Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.
－
0
Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. －
0
The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. －
0
Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again. －
The sound is cut off.
0
Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. －
0
Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. －
0
To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN
devices and other Bluetooth devices.
－
0
Reconnect the Bluetooth device. －
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
271
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
The Internet radio cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
A list of broadcasting
stations is not displayed.
0
The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. 69
0
Perform the network diagnostic mode. －
Internet Radio cannot be
played.
0
The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can
be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.
286
0
The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. －
0
The IP address is not properly set. 234
0
Check the power of the router is on. －
0
To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the
DHCP setting to “On” on this unit.
234
0
To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit. 234
0
Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a
while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.
102
Cannot connect to favorite
radio stations.
0
Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service. －
For some radio stations,
“Connection down” is
displayed and station
cannot be connected to.
0
The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service. －
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
272
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Files stored on a computer
cannot be played.
0
Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. 285
0
Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. －
0
The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer. －
0
Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can access the
folders on your computer.
106
Server is not found, or it is
not possible to connect to
the server.
0
The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings. －
0
Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power. －
0
Server is not running. Launch the server. －
0
Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address. 231
Music files on PC cannot
be played back.
0
Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC
to this unit through the network.
69
Files on PC or NAS are not
displayed.
0
Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 285
Music stored on a NAS
cannot be played.
0
If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS
setting.
－
0
If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows
Media Player’s media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
106
0
If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target. －
o
Various online services cannot be played
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Various online services
cannot be played.
0
The online service may have been discontinued. －
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
273
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
The HDMI control function does not work
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The HDMI control function
does not work.
0
Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”. 181
0
You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In addition,
depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may not work. In this case,
operate the external device directly.
143
0
Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. 143
0
When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link
operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on
again.
143
0
The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI control function. Use the HDMI
MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.
56
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
274
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Cannot connect to the
network.
0
The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the
network settings according to the setting details of this unit.
233
0
Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access
first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access
points.
－
0
Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. －
0
This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN). －
Cannot connect to WPS.
0
Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. －
0
Press the WPS button on the router and then press the “Connect” button displayed on the TV within 2
minutes.
－
0
A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to
“None”, “WPA-PSK (AES)” or WPA2-PSK (AES).
233
0
If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS
button. In this case, use the “Scan Networks” or “Manual” method to connect.
－
Cannot connect to the
network using iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad.
0
Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. －
0
When using a USB cable to configure the settings, the iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS
5 or later. When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
275
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
When using MAIN ZONE,
video output is interrupted
in HDMI ZONE2.
0
With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video
may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
－
When using HDMI ZONE2,
no video or audio is output
from the TV in ZONE2.
0
Check that the power is on for ZONE2. 156
0
Check the input source for ZONE2. 156
0
The AUX1-HDMI connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function. －
0
In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals. －
0
When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to “PCM”
on the playback device. Alternatively, set “ZONE2 Setup” - “HDMI Audio” in the menu to “PCM”.
240
0
When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output
resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.
－
When using HDMI ZONE2,
MAIN ZONE audio is
played back as PCM.
0
When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited
according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.
－
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
276
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Resetting factory settings
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.
.
X
BACK
INFO
1
Turn off the power using X.
2
Press X while simultaneously pressing INFO and
BACK.
3
Remove your fingers from the two buttons when
“Initialized” appears on the display.
Before restoring the default setting, the “Save” function of the web control function
can be used to store the various settings of the unit. (v p. 150)
However, account information for network content and information on registered
favorites cannot be stored.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
277
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is
an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier.
With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio
formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not
possible with the analog video transmission.
Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be
transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional
connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately
for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring
configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system.
This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0
Deep Color
An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr,
which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024
shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce
colors in higher definition.
Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
0
“x.v.Color”
This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables
display with natural, vivid colors.
“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.
0
3D
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals
of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that
provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
0
4K
This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video
signals of HDMI.
0
Content Type
It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type
(content information).
0
Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider
color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
0
sYCC601 color
Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is
larger than the traditional RGB color model.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Appendix
278
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
Auto Lip Sync
This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and
video.
Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
0
HDMI Pass Through
Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from
the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is
connected to the HDMI output connector.
0
HDMI Control
If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
0
Power off link
This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
0
Audio output destination switching
From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or
the AV amplifier.
0
Volume adjustment
You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
0
Input source switching
You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input
switching.
When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.
0
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through
the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit
based on the HDMI control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,
video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are
transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the
TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate
audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI
connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from
the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this
unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback
on this unit for the TV.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
279
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Supported audio formats
2-channel Linear
PCM
2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Multi-channel
Linear PCM
7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Bitstream
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD /
Dolby Digital Plus / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio / DTS Express
DSD 2-channel – 5.1-channel, 2.8224 MHz
o
Supported video signals
0
480i
0
480p
0
576i
0
576p
0
720p 60/50Hz
0
1080i 60/50Hz
0
1080p 60/50/24Hz
0
4K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD
video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to
support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright
protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of
the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0
If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio
are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or
player for more information.
When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K and
ARC functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that bears the HDMI
logo.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
280
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.
The main zone video conversion
function is compatible with the following
formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
HDMI-compatible TV
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input (IN)
Video signal Video signal
Component
video signal
HDMI signal
Output
Video device
This unit
HDMI-incompatible TV
HDMI signal
HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector
Component
video signal
Component video
connectors
Component
video connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
281
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for “Resolution” in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 185)
Output signal
Input signal
HDMI
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p 24Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz
HDMI
480i/576i
P P P P P P P P
480p/576p
P P P P P P P
720p
P P P P P P
1080i
P P P P P P
1080p 24Hz
P P P P
1080p
P P P P
4K 30/25/24Hz
P
4K 60/50Hz
P
z
Component Video
480i/576i
P P P P P P P P
480p/576p
P P P P P P P
720p
P P P P P P
1080i
P P P P P P
1080p
P P P P
Video 480i/576i
P P P P P P P P
z
The HDMI connector on the front panel is not compatible.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
282
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back a USB memory devices
0
This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0
This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0
This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0
If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly.
o
Compatible formats
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMA
z
1
32/44.1/48 kHz
48 – 192
kbps
.wma
MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz
32 – 320
kbps
.mp3
WAV
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
– .wav
MPEG-4 AAC
z
1
32/44.1/48 kHz
16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
– .flac
ALAC
z
2
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz
– .m4a
DSD 2.8 MHz –
.dsf/
.dff
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
–
.aif/
.aiff
z1
Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2
Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
283
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Maximum number of playable files and folder
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by
this unit are as follows.
Media
Item
USB memory device
Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB
Number of folder directory levels
z
1
8 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of files
z
2
5000
z1
The limited number includes the root folder.
z2
The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.
Playing back a Bluetooth device
This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.
0
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected,
monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
0
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the
Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
o
About Bluetooth communications
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation
of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and
Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference
may cause malfunctions.
0
Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated
0
Near automatic doors and fire alarms
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
284
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
0
This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0
This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0
This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0
If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly.
0
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
o
Specifications of supported files
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMA
z
1
32/44.1/48 kHz
48 – 192
kbps
.wma
MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz
32 – 320
kbps
.mp3
WAV
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
– .wav
MPEG-4 AAC
z
1
32/44.1/48 kHz
16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
– .flac
ALAC
z
2
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz
– .m4a
DSD 2.8 MHz –
.dsf/
.dff
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz
–
.aif/
.aiff
z1
Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2
Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
285
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Playing back Internet Radio
o
Playable broadcast station specifications
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz
48 – 192
kbps
.wma
MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz
32 – 320
kbps
.mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz
16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
Personal memory plus function
The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound
mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ
®
XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic
Volume, Restorer and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.
“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the
standby mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
286
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sound modes and channel output
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (v p. 220).
.
Sound mode
Channel output
Front L/R Center Surround
L/R
Surround
back L/R
Front wide
L/R
Front
height L/R
Top Front
L/R
Top
Middle L/R
Top Rear
L/R
Rear
Height L/R
Front
Dolby
Enabled
L/R
Surround
Dolby
Enabled
L/R
Back
Dolby
Enabled
L/R
Subwoofer
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)
S
D
z
7
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)
SDD
D
z
3 D
z
3 D
z
3
D
DSD Direct (2-channel)
S
D
z
7
DSD Direct (Multi-channel)
SDD D
Stereo
S D
Multi Ch In
SDD
D
z
3
D
Dolby Surround
SDD
D
z
4
DDDDDDDDD
DTS Neo:X
SDDDDD D
Audyssey DSX
®
SDD
D
z
6 D
z
6
D
Dolby Digital
SDD D
Dolby Digital Plus
SDD
D
z
3 D
z
3 D
z
3
D
Dolby TrueHD
SDD
D
z
3 D
z
3 D
z
3
D
Dolby Atmos
SDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DTS Surround
SDDD D
DTS 96/24
SDDD D
DTS-HD
SDD
D
z
3 D
z
3 D
z
3
D
DTS Express
SDDD D
Multi Ch Stereo
SDDDDDDDDD D
Rock Arena
SDDDDDDDDD D
Jazz Club
SDDDDDDDDD D
Mono Movie
SDDDDDDDDD D
Video Game
SDDDDDDDDD D
Matrix
SDDDDDDDDD D
Virtual
S D
z
1
z
2
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
z
5
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
287
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
z1
The applicable sound mode includes “Dolby Surround” and sound modes that have “+Dolby Surround” in the sound mode name.
z2
The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neo:X” and sound modes that have “+Neo:X” in the sound mode name.
z3
A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z4 Audio is not output when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” in the menu is set to “1 spkr”. (v
p. 221)
z5 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Surround Parameter” – “Speaker Select” settings. (v p. 168)
z6
Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Audyssey DSX
®
” settings. (v p. 174)
z7 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 227)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
288
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Sound modes and surround parameters
.
Sound mode
Surround Parameter
Subwoofer
Level
Adjust
Cinema EQ Loudness
Management
z
1
Dynamic
Compression
z
2
Low
Frequency
Effects
z
3
Delay Time Effect Level Room Size Speaker
Select
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)
z
4 S
z
5
SS
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)
z
4
S SSS
DSD Direct (2-channel)
S
z
5
DSD Direct (Multi-channel)
z
4
SS
Stereo
SSS
Multi Ch In
SS S
Dolby Surround
SSSS
DTS Neo:X
SSSS S
Audyssey DSX
®
SSSSS
Dolby Digital
SSSSS
Dolby Digital Plus
SSSSS
Dolby TrueHD
SSSSS
Dolby Atmos
SSSSS
DTS Surround
SS SS
DTS 96/24
SS S
DTS-HD
SS S
DTS Express
SS S
Multi Ch Stereo
S SSS S
Rock Arena
SSSSSS
Jazz Club
SSSSSS
Mono Movie
SSSSSS
Video Game
SSSSSS
Matrix
S SSSS S
Virtual
S SSS
z
1 -
z
5 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 291)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
289
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Sound mode
Surround Parameter
Dialog
Enhancer
Tone
z
6
Audyssey
Restorer
z
9
Center
Spread
Center Gain
MultEQ
®
XT32
z
7
Dunamic EQ
z
8
Dunamic
Volume
z
8
Audyssey
LFC
TMz
8
Audyssey
DSX
®
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel)
z
4
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel)
z
4
DSD Direct (2-channel)
DSD Direct (Multi-channel)
z
4
Stereo
SSSSSS S
Multi Ch In
SSSSSSS
Dolby Surround
S SSSSSS S
DTS Neo:X
SSSSSSS S
Audyssey DSX
®
SSSSSSS
Dolby Digital
SSSSSSS
Dolby Digital Plus
SSSSSSS
Dolby TrueHD
SSSSSSS
Dolby Atmos
SSSSSS
DTS Surround
SSSSSSS
DTS 96/24
SSSSSSS
DTS-HD
SSSSSSS
DTS Express
SSSSSSS
Multi Ch Stereo
SSSSSS S
Rock Arena
S
S
SSSS S
Jazz Club
SSSSSS S
Mono Movie
SSSSSS S
Video Game
SSSSSS S
Matrix
SSSSSS S
Virtual
SSSSS S
z
4,
z
6 -
z
9 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v
p. 291)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
290
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
z1
This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played back.
z2
This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS is played back.
z3
This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z4
During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode.
z5 This setting is available when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v
p. 227)
z6 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 172)
z7
This item cannot be set when Audyssey
®
Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.
z8
This item cannot be set when “MultEQ
®
XT32” in the menu is set to “Off”. (v p. 171)
z9
This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
291
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
.
Sound mode
NOTE
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Analog /
PCM
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
PCM
Multi
DTS-HD
DTS
Express
DTS ES
Dscrt6.1
DTS ES
Mtrx6.1
DTS Dolby
Atmos
Dolby
TrueHD
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Dolby
Digital
(EX)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
DTS Surround
DTS-HD MSTR
F
z
3
DTS-HD HI RES
F
z
4
DTS ES Dscrt6.1
z
1
F
DTS ES Mtrx6.1
z
1
F
DTS Surround
SSF
DTS 96/24
F
z
5
DTS(-HD) + Dolby Surround
SSSSS
DTS Express
F
DTS(-HD) + Neo:X
z
2
SSSSS
DTS Neo:X
SSFS
Dolby Surround
Dolby Atmos
F
Dolby TrueHD
S
z
6
S
Dolby Digital+
S
z
7
S
Dolby(D+)(HD) + Dolby Surround
FFF
Dolby Digital
S
Dolby(D)(D+)(HD) + Neo:X
z
2 S
z
8
SSS
Dolby Surround
SFSS
z
1 -
z
8: “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 294)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
292
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
Sound mode
NOTE
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Analog /
PCM
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
PCM
Multi
DTS-HD
DTS
Express
DTS ES
Dscrt6.1
DTS ES
Mtrx6.1
DTS Dolby
Atmos
Dolby
TrueHD
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Dolby
Digital
(EX)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
Multi Ch In
Multi Ch In
F F
Multi Ch In + Dolby Surround
S S
Multi Ch In + Neo:X
z
2
S S
Multi Ch In 7.1
z
1 F
z
10
Audyssey
Audyssey DSX
®
SSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Direct
Direct
S
z
9
SS SSSSSSSSSS
DSD Direct
S S
Pure Direct
Pure Direct
SSS SSSSSSSSSS
DSD Pure Direct
S S
Original sound mode
Multi Ch Stereo
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
Rock Arena
SSSSSSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Jazz Club
SSSSSSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Mono Movie
SSSSSSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Video Game
SSSSSSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Matrix
SSSSSSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Virtual
SSSSSSSSSS
S
z
8
SSSS
Stereo
Stereo
FSSFSSSSSSSSSSS
z
1 -
z
2,
z
8 -
z
10 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 294)
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
293
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
z1
This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.
z2
The “Cinema” mode, “Music” mode or “Game” mode can be selected. This item can be selected when using any of the surround back, front height or front wide speaker.
z3
This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio.
z4
This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution.
z5
This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.
z6
This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal.
z7
This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal.
z8
This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.
z9
The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is “Direct”.
z10
This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
294
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Explanation of terms
o
Audyssey
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume
is decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32
to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX
®
is a new surround enhancement technology that raises
the surround effect and impression to realize a larger surround space by
adding a new channel to the existing 5.1 channel system.
In research on human hearing characteristics, two points can be broadly
cited as elements that enhance the surround effect. The most important
point is the creation of horizontal spread (wide channel) at the front
(forward) area in composing a realistic surround space. The next
important point is the creation of vertical spread (height channel) in the
front (forward) area using recognizable (audible) acoustic signals so as to
create a surround space with depth.
Audyssey DSX
®
then creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the
next most important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition, Audyssey
DSX
®
does not simply add a channel but combines the existing front,
surround and rear surround sound to develop a technology known as
“Surround Envelopment Processing” which has been incorporated into
Audyssey DSX
®
to further enhance the effect.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
295
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level
between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
is integrated into Dynamic
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
clarity remain the same.
Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing
people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC™ dynamically
monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass
through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic
processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room.
The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates
any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every
listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements,
MultEQ
®
XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both
time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also
performs a fully automated surround system setup.
o
Dolby
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of
dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos
is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio
as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and
move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during
playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height
plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV
receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc,
downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room.
This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and
scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of
every size and configuration.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
296
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2
surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequency effects.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround
sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is
upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater
flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the
playback device.
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently
up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround
speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker
layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-
ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Enabled Speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing
Dolby speaker technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective
surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby
enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal
processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone
speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint
while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and
Dolby surround playback.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
297
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the
sound of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.
o
DTS
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio
system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic
surround sound experience, and is found in the world’s finest movie
theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in
5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to
5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
298
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround
back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also
possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-
channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced
functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional
audio for Blu-ray Disc.
This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high
sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels
are supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional
DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling
frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital
sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This
format is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital
Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8
audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and
up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit
resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS Neo:X
This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to
playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround sources as a
maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound. There are 3 modes: “Music”
suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game”
which is optimized for playing games.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
299
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Audio
ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by
Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data
compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly
the same original data.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio
file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss
in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output
channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system
subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,
using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound
quality equivalent to a music CD.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
300
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for
the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1
Video”, “MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media
®
Player.
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft
Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at
regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in
digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling
frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω (Ohms).
Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Dialog normalization function
This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the
minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a
lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s
configuration.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
301
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Video
ISF
ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video
technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment
to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the
optimization of device video performance.
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video
as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and jagged edges.
o
Network
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current
DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be
applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael”
algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into
blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of
128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well,
offering extremely high encryption security.
AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. Some contents may not be compatible
with other DLNA CERTIFIED
®
products.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
302
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, the
same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing the
network key used for encryption for each packet.
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet Radio.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website:
http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing
Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
WEP Key (network key)
This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data
transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and
decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for
communications to be established between them.
Wi-Fi
®
Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi
Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to
the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also
uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger
security.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)
This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a
preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and
client.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of
setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security. There are
two methods: push-button and PIN (Personal Identification Number) code.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
303
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network
names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication
is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is
suitable for temporarily constructing a simplified network.
Modem
Device that connects to your broadband internet provider, and is very
often supplied with the service. A type that is integrated with a router is
also often available.
o
Media player
iTunes
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc.
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc. It
enables management and playback of multimedia contents including
music and movies. iTunes supports many main file formats including AAC,
WAV, and MP3.
Windows Media Player
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation.
It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player,
as well as WMA, WAV, and other files.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
304
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Others
App Store
App Store is a site that sells application software for such devices as the
iPhone or iPod Touch, and is operated by Apple Inc.
Denon Link HD
Denon Link HD uses the clock of the AV amplifier connected by Denon
Link HD to achieve HDMI signal transfer with low jitter.
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright
protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being
copied without authorization.
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback
is called ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback
is called ZONE3.
Pairing
Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a
Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices
authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections
occurring.
When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this
unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
This unit can store pairing information for a maximum of 8 devices.
Protection circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply
when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over
temperature for any reason.
If a malfunction occurs in this unit, the power indicator blinks red and the
unit switches to standby mode.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
305
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Trademark information
.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
0
Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is
permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ
®
, Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
, Audyssey DSX
®
and Audyssey
LFC™ are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc.
is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
306
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the
Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio
and DTS Neo:X | 11.1 are a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC in the United States and other countries.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the
interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies
interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
.
Adobe, the Adobe logo and Reader are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
307
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Specifications
o
Audio section
0
Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:
140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
175 W + 175 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
175 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
175 W + 175 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back / Height1 / Front wide/Height2:
140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
175 W + 175 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Dynamic power: 160 W x 2-channel (8 Ω/ohms)
250 W x 2-channel (4 Ω/ohms)
Output connectors: 4 – 16 Ω/ohms
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
308
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ/kohms
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (Direct mode)
S/N: 102 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (Direct mode)
Rated output: 1.2 V
0
Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
0
Phono equalizer
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (IHF-A)
Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
309
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Video section
0
Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB
0
Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
P
B
/ C
B
signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
P
R
/ C
R
signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB
o
Tuner section
[FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10
–15
W)
Reception frequency range: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz 522 kHz – 1611 kHz
Effective sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV
50 dB sensitivity: MONO ― 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)
S/N ratio (IHF-A): MONO ― 70 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
STEREO ― 67 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
Distortion: MONO ― 0.7 % (1 kHz)
STEREO ― 1.0 % (1 kHz)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
310
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Wireless LAN section
Network type (wireless LAN standard):
Conforming to Wi-Fi
®z
1
Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit
WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
Radio frequency: 2.4 GHz
No. of channels: 1 – 13 ch
z1
The Wi-Fi
®
CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
311
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Bluetooth section
Communications system: Bluetooth Version 2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Transmission power: Maximum 2.5 mW (Class 2)
Maximum communication range:
Approx. 10 m in line of sight
z
2
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz band
Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Supported profiles: A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.4
Corresponding codec: SBC, AAC
Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz
z2
The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from
microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.
o
General
Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 730 W
Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 W
Power consumption in CEC standby
mode:
0.5 W
Power consumption in network standby
mode:
4.5 W
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
312
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
Dimensions (Unit : mm)
.
434
237
55
70
15
152
167
235
339
393
22
12
32
344
60
45 45
o
Weight: 14.1 kg
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
313
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Index
v Numerics
11.1-channel ............................................ 43, 52
3D ................................................................ 278
4K ................................................................ 278
5.1-channel .................................. 33, 40, 49, 50
7.1-channel .................................. 32, 41, 46, 47
9.1-channel .............................................. 42, 45
v A
Accessories ..................................................... 8
Add New Feature ......................................... 247
Adjusting the volume ...................................... 76
Adjusting volume of each channel ................ 123
AirPlay .......................................................... 113
All Zone Stereo ............................................ 127
Audio formats ....................... 280, 283, 285, 286
Audio settings ....................................... 158, 164
Audyssey DSX® .......................................... 295
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 295
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 296
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 296
Audyssey settings ................................ 171, 196
Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 194
Auto Standby ............................................... 239
v B
Bi-amp connection ......................................... 44
v C
Cables ............................................................ 27
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ................... 61
Connecting a cable TV ................................... 60
Connecting a DVD player ............................... 61
Connecting a game console ........................... 63
Connecting a satellite tuner ............................ 60
Connecting a set-top box ............................... 60
Connecting a TV ................................. 56, 57, 58
Connecting a video camera ........................... 63
Connecting an external control device ........... 71
Connecting an iPod ........................................ 65
Connecting an USB memory device .............. 65
Connecting a Denon Link HD ......................... 62
Connecting an FM/AM antenna ...................... 67
Connecting a power cord ............................... 73
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ............ 69
Connecting ZONE2/ZONE3 ................... 48, 151
v D
Denon Link HD ............................................. 305
Direct sound mode ....................................... 136
Display ........................................................... 19
DLNA ........................................................... 302
Dolby Atmos ................................................. 296
Dolby sound mode ............................... 132, 297
DTS sound mode ................................. 133, 298
v E
ECO Mode ................................................... 238
Error messages (Audyssey® Setup) ............ 202
Explanation of terms/technology .......... 278, 295
v F
Firmware Update .......................................... 246
Front panel ..................................................... 15
v G
General settings ................................... 160, 238
v H
HDCP ........................................................... 280
HDMI Control ....................................... 143, 181
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
314
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
v I
Input Assign ................................................. 190
Input signal ................................................... 292
Input source settings ............................ 159, 190
Inputting characters ...................................... 162
Inserting the batteries ....................................... 9
iPod Browse Mode ......................................... 79
iTunes .......................................................... 304
v J
JPEG ...................................................... 82, 105
v L
Listening position ......................................... 194
Listening to Spotify ....................................... 116
v M
Menu map .................................................... 158
v N
Network settings ................................... 231, 231
v O
Original sound mode .................................... 135
v P
Pairing a Bluetooth device ........................ 86, 89
PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 134
Picture Mode ................................................ 126
Playing back a Bluetooth device .................... 87
Playing back a Blu-ray Disc player ................. 76
Playing back a DVD player ............................. 76
Playing back an iPod ...................................... 77
Playing back Flickr ....................................... 112
Playing back from PC ................................... 105
Playing back Internet Radio ......................... 101
Playing back NAS ........................................ 105
Playing back USB memory device ................. 82
Playing back ZONE2/ZONE3 ....................... 151
Preset codes ................................................ 317
Protection circuit .......................................... 305
Pure Direct ................................................... 130
v Q
Quick select plus .......................................... 146
v R
Random playback .................................. 81, 118
Rear panel ...................................................... 21
Remote control unit ........................................ 24
Remove from Favorites ................................ 120
Repeat playback .................................... 81, 118
Resetting factory settings ............................. 277
Restorer ....................................................... 169
v S
Save to Favorites ......................................... 119
Selecting the input source .............................. 75
Setup Assistant ............................................ 160
Sleep timer ................................................... 144
Slideshow .................................................... 121
Slideshow Interval ........................................ 122
Sound mode ................................. 129, 287, 289
Speaker connection ....................................... 28
Speaker Settings .................................. 159, 194
Stereo sound mode ...................................... 136
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
315
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
v T
Text Search .................................................. 120
Tips .............................................................. 257
Tone Control ................................................ 124
Troubleshooting ........................................... 259
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) ..... 76
Turning the power on ..................................... 75
v V
Video Conversion ................................. 184, 281
Video Select ................................................. 125
Video settings ....................................... 158, 177
v W
Web control .................................................. 149
Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 232
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
316
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
List of preset codes
To return a preset code to the default settings, register the AVR code “73347” to the button whose preset code you want to cancel.
AVR
.
D
Denon 73347
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
CBL
A
AT&T 00858
B
Bright House 01376, 01877
C
Cable & Wireless
01068
Cable One 01376, 01877
Cablevision 01376, 01877
Charter 01376, 01877
Cisco 01877, 00858, 02378
Com Hem 02015
Comcast 01376, 01877
Cox 01376, 01877
D
Daeryung 01877
F
Freebox 01976
I
Insight 01376, 01877
K
KabelBW 02174
Knology 01877
M
Mediacom 01376, 01877
Motorola 01376, 00858, 02378
N
NTL 01060, 01068
O
Ono 01068
Optus 01060
P
Pace 01376, 01877, 01060, 01068
Philips 02174
Pioneer 01877
Premiere 02174
R
RCN 01376
Rogers 01877
S
Samsung 01877, 01060, 02015, 02174
Scientific Atlanta
01877, 00858
Shaw 01376
Stofa 02015
Suddenlink 01376, 01877
T
Telewest 01068
Thomson 02174
Time Warner 01376, 01877
V
Verizon 02378
Videotron 01877
Virgin Media 01060, 01068
VTR 01376
W
WideOpenWest 01877
Z
Ziggo 02015
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
317
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
S
Samsung 01877
Scientific Atlanta
01877
Shaw 01376
Suddenlink 01376, 01877
T
Time Warner 01376, 01877
V
Videotron 01877
VTR 01376
W
WideOpenWest
01877
IP TV
A
AT&T 00858
C
Cisco 00858, 02378
M
Motorola 01376, 00858, 02378
P
Philips 02174
S
Samsung 02174
Scientific Atlanta
00858
T
Thomson 02174
V
Verizon 02378
MEDIA PLAYER
A
Apple 02615
N
Netgear 03292
P
Philips 01272, 03526
R
Roku 03061
S
Sony 02713
T
Tec 03522
W
Western Digital 02558
SAT
A
Acoustic Solutions
01284
Alba 01284
Amstrad 00847, 01175
Aurora 00879
Austar 00879
Avanit 01631
B
Bell ExpressVu 00775
Black Diamond 01284
Boshmann 01631
British Sky
Broadcasting
00847, 01175
BskyB 00847, 01175
Bush 01284
C
Century 00856
CityCom 01176
Com Hem 01176, 01915
Crown 01284
CS 01631
D
Dgtec 01631
Digi Raum
Electronics
01176
Digihome 01284
DigiLogic 01284
DigiQuest 01631
DigitalBox 01631
Digiwave 01631
DirecTV 01377, 00099
CBL/PVR Combination
B
Bright House 01376, 01877
C
Cable One 01376, 01877
Cablevision 01376, 01877
Charter 01376, 01877
Cisco 01877
Comcast 01376, 01877
Cox 01376, 01877
F
Freebox 01976
I
Insight 01376, 01877
K
Knology 01877
M
Mediacom 01376, 01877
Motorola 01376
P
Pace 01877
Pioneer 01877
R
Rogers 01877
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
318
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
J
JVC 00775
K
KabelBW 01195, 01915
Koenig 01631
L
Lava 01631
Linsar 01284
Lodos 01284
Logik 01284
M
Matsui 01284
MegaSat 01631
Metronic 01631
Motorola 00856
Multichoice 00879
MySky 01356
N
Netsat 00099
NPG 01631
O
Onn 01284
Optus 00879, 01356
Orbitech 01195
P
Pace 00847, 01175, 01356
Pacific 01284
Panasat 00879
Panasonic 00847
Philips 00856, 00099
Proline 01284
S
SAB 01631
Samsung 01377, 01175
SatyCon 01631
Schwaiger 01631
SEG 01284
Shark 01631
SKY 00856, 00099, 00847, 01175
SKY Brazil 00856
SKY Mexico 00856
Sky+ 01175
SkyCable 01631
Skyplus 01175
Skyworth 01631
Smart 01631
Sony 00847
Strong 00879, 01284
T
Technika 01284
TechniSat 01195
Techwood 01284
Telestar 01195
Thomson 00847, 01175
Toshiba 01284
Triax 01631
Tricolor TV 01176
U
UEC 00879, 01356
V
Vestel 01284
Viasat 01195
Viva 00856
W
Wharfedale 01284
X
Xsat 00847
Z
Zehnder 01631
Zenith 00856
Dish Network 00775
Dishpro 00775
DRE 01176
DSTV 00879
Durabrand 01284
E
Echostar 00775
Edision 01631
Energy Sistem 01631
Expressvu 00775
F
Foxtel 00879, 01176, 01356
Fuji Onkyo 01631
G
Galaxis 00879
General Satellite
01176
GOI 00775
Gold Vision 01631
Goodmans 01284
Gradiente 00856, 00099
Grundig 00847, 00879, 01284
H
Hitachi 01284
HTS 00775
Hughes Network
Systems
01377
Humax 01377, 01176, 01915
I
ID Digital 01176
ILLUSION sat 01631
Imperial 01195
Indovision 00856
Innova 00099
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
319
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
CBL/SAT/PVR Combination
C
Com Hem 01176
F
Foxtel 01356
H
Humax 01176
P
Pace 01356
T
TechniSat 01195
SAT/PVR Combination
A
Amstrad 01175
B
Bell ExpressVu 00775
British Sky
Broadcasting
01175
BskyB 01175
D
DirecTV 01377, 00099
Dish Network 00775
Dishpro 00775
E
Echostar 00775
Edision 01631
Expressvu 00775
O
P
Orbitech 01195
Pace 01175,01356
S
Samsung 01377,01175
T
TechniSat 01195
V
Viasat 01195
Thomson 01175
Telestar 01195
SkyCable 01631
Skyworth 01631
Smart 01631
SKY 01175
Skyplus 01175
Philips 00099
F
Foxtel 01356
Fuji Onkyo 01631
H
Humax 01377, 01176
J
JVC 00775
M
MegaSat 01631
MySky 01356
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
320
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TV group
Registrable input source button :
.
TV
A
A.R. Systems 10556
Acoustic Solutions
11037
AEG 11037
Akai 10556
Akura 11037
Alba 11037
Alien 11037
Amstrad 11037
AOC 10625
Aristona 10556
ART 11037
B
Barco 10556
Basic Line 10556, 11037
Belstar 11037
Berthen 10556
Black Diamond 11037
Blue Sky 10556, 10625, 11037
Brandt 10625
Bush 10556, 11037
C
Carad 11037
Centrum 11037
Clayton 11037
CPTEC 10625
Crown 11037
D
D-Vision 10556
Daewoo 10556
Dantax 11037
Dual 11037
Durabrand 11037
E
Elbe 10556
Elfunk 11037
Emerson 11864
Excello 11037
F
Ferguson 10625, 11037
Finlux 10556
Firstline 10556, 11037
Freesat 11636
Funai 11037
G
Gaba 11037
GE 11454, 10625
GFM 11864
Goodmans 10556, 10625, 11037
Grandin 10556, 11037
Grundig 10556
H
Hanseatic 10556, 10625
Hisense 10556
Hitachi 11643, 11037, 11691
Hypson 10556, 11037
Hyundai 11037
I
Inno Hit 11037
Insignia 11423
Internal 10556
J
Jinxing 10556
JMB 10556
Jubilee 10556
JVC 11601, 11428
K
Kathrein 10556
Kendo 11037
Kennex 11037
Kioto 10556
Kneissel 10556
L
Lavis 11037
Lenco 11037
LG 11423, 10556
Lifetec 11037
Lodos 11037
Logik 11037
Luma 11037
Luxor 11037
M
Magnavox 11454
Manhattan 11037
Marantz 11454, 10556
Matsui 10556, 11037
Mediator 10556
Medion 10556, 11037
MEI 11037
Memorex 11037
Metronic 10625
Metz 11037
Micromaxx 11037
Mikomi 11037
Mitsubishi 11250, 10556, 11037, 12313
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
321
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TV group
Registrable input source button :
.
Multitec 11037
Myryad 10556
N
Neckermann 10556
NEI 11037
Neufunk 10556
New Tech 10556
O
O.K.Line 11037
Orion 10556, 11037
Ormond 11037
Osaki 10556
Otto Versand 10556
P
Pacific 10556, 11037
Palladium 10556
Panasonic 11636, 12170
Pansonic 11636
Philips 10810, 11454, 10556
Phonola 10556
Pioneer 11457, 11636
Prinston 11037
Proline 10625, 11037
Protech 11037
ProVision 10556
Pye 10556
Q
Quelle 11037
R
Radiola 10556
Radiotone 11037
RCA 11454, 10625, 12429
Reflex 11037
Roadstar 11037
S
Saba 10625
Saivod 11037
Samsung 12051, 10556
Sanyo 11142, 11037
SBR 10556
Schneider 10556, 11037
Schoentech 11037
Seelver 11037
SEG 11037
Sharp 11423, 10818, 11407, 13101
Siera 10556
SilverCrest 11037
Sony 10810, 11167, 12778
Soundwave 11037
Standard 11037
SuperTech 10556
Sylvania 11864
T
TCL 12429
Teac 11037
Technica 11037
Technics 10556
TechniSat 10556
Technosonic 10556, 10625
Techwood 11037
Tecnimagen 10556
Telefunken 10625
Telestar 10556
Teletech 11037
Tensai 11037
Tesla 10556, 11037
Tevion 10556, 11037
Thomson 10625
Tokai 11037
Tokaido 11037
Topline 11037
Toshiba
11524, 11037, 11508, 12311, 13105
TRANS-continents 10556, 11037
Triad 10556
Triumph 10556
TVTEXT 95 10556
U
United 10556, 11037
Universum 11037
V
Vestel 11037
Victor 11428
Vizio 11758
W
Waltham 11037
Watson 11037
Weltstar 11037
Wharfedale 10556
Wilson 10556
Windsor 11037
Windy Sam 10556
Y
Yamaha 11407
Z
Zenith 11423
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
322
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
TV group
Registrable input source button :
.
TV/DVD Combination
B
Black Diamond 11037
Blue Sky 11037
Bush 11037
C
Centrum 11037
Crown 11037
D
Dual 11037
E
Elfunk 11037
Emerson 11864
F
Ferguson 11037
G
Goodmans 11037
H
Hitachi 11037
L
LG 11423
Logik 11037
Luxor 11037
M
Matsui 11037
P
Panasonic 12170
Philips 11454, 10556
S
Samsung 12051
SEG 11037
Sharp 10818
Sony 12778
Sylvania 11864
T
Technica 11037
Teletech 11037
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 11524
U
United 11037
V
Vestel 11037
W
Weltstar 11037
TV/VCR Combination
F
Ferguson 10625
G
Grundig 10556
M
Mitsubishi 10556
P
Philips 10556
R
Radiola 10556
S
Saba 10625
Schneider 10556
Sharp 10818
T
Technics 10556
Thomson 10625
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
323
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
VCR/PVR group
Registrable input source button :
.
VCR
D
DirecTV 20739
H
Humax 20739
P
Philips 20739
T
TiVo 20739
PVR
D
DirecTV 20739
H
Humax 20739
P
Philips 20739
T
TiVo 20739
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
324
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
BD/DVD group
Registrable input source button :
.
DVD
3
3D LAB 30539
A
Accurian 30675
AEG 30675
Akai 30675
Alba 30539
Aristona 30539
B
Bel Canto Design
31571
Blue Parade 30571
Brandt 30503
C
California Audio
Labs
30490
Centrum 30675
Clatronic 30675
D
Dantax 30539
Denon 30490, 31634, 33698, 32258
Disney 30675
DSE 30675
Durabrand 30675
E
Emerson 30675
EuroLine 30675
F
Finlux 30741
Funai 30675
G
GFM 30675
Go Video 30741
GoldStar 30741
GPX 30741
Grundig 30539
H
Hanseatic 30741
Hitachi 30573
I
Insignia 30675, 30741
Integra 30571, 31634, 32147
J
JVC 30539, 30503
K
Kenwood 30490
L
LG 30741
Loewe 30539, 30741
Lumatron 30741
Lunatron 30741
Luxman 30573
M
Magnavox 30539, 30503, 30675
Marantz 30539, 32414
Medion 30741
Metz 30571
Micromedia 30539, 30503
Micromega 30539
N
NAD 30741
NEC 30741
O
Onkyo 30503, 32147
P
Panasonic
30490, 31641, 30503, 32523, 32859
Philco 30675
Philips
32056, 30539, 32434, 30503, 30675
Pioneer
30571, 30142, 30631, 31571, 32442
Polk Audio 30539
Presidian 30675
Pye 30539
R
Radionette 30741
RCA 30571
REC 30490
S
Salora 30741
Samsung 30199, 30573, 30490
Schneider 30539
Semp 30503
Sharp 30675, 32250, 32479, 33313
Sherwood 30741
Silva Schneider 30741
Skantic 30539
Sony
31633, 31516, 31033, 32178, 32180,
33519
Sylvania 30675
Symphonic 30675
T
Targa 30741
Tchibo 30741
TCM 30741
Teac 30675, 30741, 30571
Technics 30490
Theta Digital 30571
Toshiba 30503, 32705
U
United 30675
Universum 30741
Urban Concepts 30503
W
Windy Sam 30573
Y
Yamaha 30490, 30539, 32298
Z
Zenith 30503, 30741
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
325
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
BD/DVD group
Registrable input source button :
.
DVD-R
A
Accurian 30675
D
Denon 30490
E
Emerson 30675
F
Funai 30675
G
Go Video 30741
GPX 30741
L
LG 30741
Loewe 30741
M
Magnavox 30675
Medion 30741
P
Panasonic 30490, 32523, 32859
Pioneer 30631
S
Samsung 30490
Sharp 30675, 32479, 33313
Sony
31633, 31516, 31033, 32178, 32180,
33519
Sylvania 30675
T
Targa 30741
Z
Zenith 30741
HD-DVD
L
LG 30741
Blu-ray Disc
D
Denon 32661,33698, 32258
F
Funai 30675
I
Insignia 30675
Integra 32147
L
LG 30741
M
Magnavox 30675
Marantz 32534,32414
O
Onkyo 32147
P
Panasonic 31641, 32523, 32859
Philips 32434
Pioneer 30142, 32442
S
Samsung 30199
Sharp 32250, 32479, 33313
Sony 31516, 32178, 32180, 33519
Sylvania 30675
T
Toshiba 32705
Y
Yamaha 32298
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
326
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Audio group
Registrable input source button :
.
CD
D
M
Denon 42867, 42868
Marantz 41985
CD-R
D
Denon 42868
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
327
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
License
This section describes software license used for this unit.
To maintain the correct content, the original (English) is used.
o
Boost
http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License – Version 1.0 – August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining
a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license
(the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the
Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above
license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
o
Expat
http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html
Expat License. Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center
Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
o
FastDelegate
http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.aspx
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS
CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY
COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK
OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS
PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU
ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE
AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION
OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU
CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
328
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
Definitions. “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which
describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a
user.
“Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this
License.
“Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other
pre-existing works.
“Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any
required data files included in the Work.
“Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other
medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.
“Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to
create the Executable Files.
“Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been
modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full
discretion of the Author.
“Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the
Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and
the Articles.
“You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights
under this License.
Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or
restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the
exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby
grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the
applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: You
may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own
applications.
You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the
Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be
considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.
You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way
to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each
changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.
You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or
Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a
larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.
The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be
distributed or republished without the Author’s consent. The author retains copyright
to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to
this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make
available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or
Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be
subject to the terms of this License.
Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to
and limited by the following restrictions: You agree not to remove any of the original
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that
may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.
You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your
own.
The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.
You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you
from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution
that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
329
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of
this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for,
this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute
and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees
that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code.
You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of
this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not
sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to
the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source
Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a
manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.
You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages
containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable
export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to
the Work after Your receipt of the Work.
Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
“WHERE IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME
ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT
INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-
INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS
CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS
DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE
WORKS.
Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the
Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and
expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to
any use of the Work by You.
Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU
ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE
USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE
PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Termination.
This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any
breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received
Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses
terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those
licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this
License.
If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against
any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License
from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.
Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration
of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author
reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop
distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not
serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to
be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full
force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any
circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the
subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in
connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal
theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,
incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The
Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time
without notice
Miscellaneous
This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the
Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of
residence of the Author.
If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this
License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall
be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
enforceable.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
330
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach
consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the
Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations
with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any
additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License
may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You
o
libogg
http://www.xiph.org/ogg/
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
o
libvorbis
http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/
Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
o
Tremolo
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo
Copyright (C) 2002 – 2009 Xiph.org Foundation Changes Copyright (C) 2009 – 2010
Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
331
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
0
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
o
Tremor
http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
o
Mersenne Twister
http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c
Copyright (C) 1997 – 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
332
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
o
zlib
http://www.zlib.net/
zlib.h -- interface of the “zlib” general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July
18th, 2005
Copyright (C) 1995 – 2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided “as-is”, without any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions:
The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment
in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org, Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu
o
cURL
http://curl.haxx.se
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 – 2011, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
o
c-ares
http://c-ares.haxx.se
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation
for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this
software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
333
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
o
License information for the software used in
the unit
About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL (GNU Lesser
General Public License) License
This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software made by other
companies.
After you purchase this product, you may procure, modify or distribute
the source code of the GPL/LGPL software that is used in the product.
Denon provides the source code based on the GPL and LPGL
licenses at the actual cost upon your request to our customer service
center.
However, note that we make no guarantees concerning the source
code.
Please also understand that we do not offer support for the contents of
the source code.
Contents
Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
334
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index
.
www.denon.com
D&M Holdings Inc.
3520 10308 00AD
335
3 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Denon AVR-X5200W bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Denon AVR-X5200W in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,12 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Denon AVR-X5200W

Denon AVR-X5200W Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 335 pagina's

Denon AVR-X5200W Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 335 pagina's

Denon AVR-X5200W Snelstart handleiding - English - 12 pagina's

Denon AVR-X5200W Gebruiksaanwijzing - Espanõl - 345 pagina's

Denon AVR-X5200W Snelstart handleiding - Espanõl - 12 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info